GLENAIR S9407-AB-HBK-010

S9407-AB-HBK-010
Revision 2
HANDBOOK
OF
SHIPBOARD ELECTROMAGNETIC
SHIELDING PRACTICES
This document supersedes S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 1
date published 30 September 1989
APPROVED FOR PUBLIC RELEASE; DISTRIBUTION IS UNLIMITED
Published by Direction of Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command
30 DECEMBER 1996
CHANGE 2: 22 FEBRUARY 2010
NOTICE OF CHANGE
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 2
CHANGE 2
22 FEBRUARY 2010
HANDBOOK OF
SHIPBOARD ELECTROMAGNETIC
SHIELDING PRACTICES
TO ALL HOLDERS OF S9407-AB-HBK-010 REVISION 2, CHANGE 1:
1.
THE FOLLOWING PAGES OF S9407-AB-HBK-010 REVISION 2,
CHANGE 1 HAVE BEEN REVISED AND SUPERSEDE THE PAGES LISTED:
NEW PAGE
DATE
SUPERSEDED PAGE
Title
A
e/f
i/ii
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
3-9
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
30 December 1996
Title
A
i/ii
1-7
1-8
1-9
1-10
3-9
3-10
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
30 December 1996
3-10
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
D-1
D-2
D-3
22 February 2010
22 February 2010
30 December 1996
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-4
22 February 2010
D-4
DATE
1 March 1999
1 March 1999
1 March 1999
30 December 1996
30 December 1996
30 December 1996
30 December 1996
REPRINTED WITHOUT
CHANGE
30 December 1996
1 March 1999
1 March 1999
1 March 1999
REPRINTED WITHOUT
CHANGE
1 March 1999
1 March 1999
REPRINTED WITHOUT
CHANGE
30 December 1996
1
2.
It should also be noted that the header on some pages of S9407-AB-HBK010 Revision 2 remain incorrectly listed as S9408-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2. The
header of these pages should be redlined to indicate the correct header of
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2. The pages that require this change are 3-3, 3-4, 51 through 5-18, 5-21, 5-22, 5-25 through 5-36, 6-3 through 6-8, 6-13, 6-14, 6-17
through 6-34, 6-37, and 6-38.
3.
It should also be noted that OPNAVIST 5100.23D of January 1999
restricts the use of material containing cadmium. While the use of material
containing cadmium is typically allowed via a waiver request when no processing
of this material (i.e. welding, grinding, soldering) which results in a release to the
shipboard environment occurs, it is still advisable to reduce the amount of this
material shipboard. Throughout this Handbook the use of cadmium plated
materials is listed, in all instances the use of cadmium-free equivalent material
can be used if desired.
4.
RETAIN THIS NOTICE AND INSERT BEFORE TABLE OF CONTENTS.
5.
Holders of S9407-AB-HBK-010 Revision 2, Change 1 will verify that page
changes and additions indicated above have been entered. This notice page will
be retained as a checksheet. This issuance, together with appended pages, is a
separate publication. Each notice is to be retained by stocking points until the
handbook is completely revised or canceled.
2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
Dates of issue for original and changed pages are:
Original (Revision 2)
30 December 96
Change 1
1 March 99
Change 2
22 February 10
TOTAL NUMBER OF PAGES IN THIS PUBLICATION IS 256 CONSISTING OF THE FOLLOWING:
Page No.
*Change
No.
Title Page…………………
2
A……………………………
2
a/b…………………………
0
1
c/d……………………………
2
e/f……………………………
i/ii……………………………
2
0
1-i/1-ii………………………
1-1 through 1-6……………
0
1-7 through 1-10…………
2
2-i/2-ii………………………
1
2-1…………………………
0
2-2…………………………
1
0
2-3 and 2-4………………..
2-5…………………………
1
2-6…………………………
0
2-7……...……………………
1
2-8…………………………
0
3-i/3-ii………………………
0
3-1…………………………
1
3-2 through 3-6……………
0
1
3-7 and 3-8…………………
3-9…………………………
0
3-10…………………………
2
4-i and 4-ii……..……………
1
0
4-1 through 4-9……………
4-10 though 4-12…………
1
0
4-13…………………………
4-14…………………………
1
0
4-15…………………………
4-16…………………………
1
0
4-17…………………………
4-18…………………………
1
0
4-19 and 4-20………………
1
4-21…………………………
4-22…………………………
0
1
4-23…………………………
4-24 through 4-26…………
0
0
5-i and 5-ii …………………
5-1 through 5-18…………
0
1
5-19 and 5-20………………
5-21 and 5-22………………
0
1
5-23…………………………
5-24 through 5-36…………
0
*Zero in this column indicates an original page.
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
A
Page No.
6-i and 6-ii………...…….
6-1……………………….
6-2 through 6-9………...
6-10……………………..
6-11……………………..
6-12……………………..
6-13 through 6-15……...
6-16……………………..
6-17 through 6-35……...
6-36……………………..
6-37and 6-38…………...
6-39/6-40……………….
7-i and 7-ii………………
7-1 and 7-2……………..
7-3……………………….
7-4 through 7-21……….
7-22 through 7-26……...
7-27 and 7-28…………..
A-1/A-ii………………….
A-1 through A-6………..
B-i/B-ii…...………………
B-1 through B-6………..
C-i/C-ii…………………..
C-1 through C-3………..
C-4 through C-8………..
D-i and D-ii……………..
D-iii and D-iv……………
D-1 and D-2…………….
D-3………………………
D-4………………………
D-5 through D-7………..
D-8………………………
D-9………………………
D-10……………………..
D-11……………………..
D-12……………………..
D-13 through D-14…….
D-15 through D-18…….
E-i/E-ii…………………...
E-1 through E-19/E-20..
F-1/F-ii…………………..
F-1 and F-2……………..
F-3/F-4………………….
*Change
No.
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
1
0
2
0
2
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
Reprinted without change
a/b
c/d
e/f
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
HANDBOOK OF SHIPBOARD
ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING PRACTICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TITLE PAGE
PAGE NO.
LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES
A
LETTER OF PROMULGATION
a/b
PROMULGATION/AUTHORIZATION OF CHANGE 1
c/d
PROMULGATION/AUTHORIZATION OF CHANGE 2
e/f
TABLE OF CONTENTS
i/ii
SECTION
1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2
RIGID SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
3
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
4
GR2000 SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (BRAZE-ON TYPE)
5
RP2000 SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (REUSABLE TYPE)
6
CABLE AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS
7
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES, BONDING AND GROUNDING
APPENDIX
A
SEPARATION AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 5 OF NAVSEA
0967-LP-283-5010
B
GUIDELINES FOR SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT AN
INTERFACE
C
QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST FOR FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
D
SPECIFICATION FOR FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
E
CABLE COMPARISON CHART
F
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS IN THE
PRESENCE OF DC GENERATING COILS
DISTRIBUTION LIST
NOTE
A detailed table of contents is provided at the beginning of each section and appendix.
An index to Appendix D is provided at the end of Appendix D
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
i/ii
SECTION 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.3
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.4
1-1
1-1
1-1
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................
Scope ....................................................................................................................
OBJECTIVE .................................................................................................................
Design Philosophy on Cable Spacing and Shielding.............................................
BACKGROUND ...........................................................................................................
Revision 2..............................................................................................................
Document Applicability ..........................................................................................
LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS .....................................................................
1-i/1-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1.1
INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this handbook is to specify requirements and to provide technical guidance in
the design and installation of electrical cables, cableways and shielding associated with electrical and
electronic systems installed aboard submarines, in below-decks areas of surface ships, and in many
shore-based installations. Proper use of this technical guidance will ensure electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) of these systems.
This handbook is intended for use by ship designers, work planners and personnel engaged
in the installation of electrical and electronic cables and equipment for new ship construction,
SHIPALT installation and repair at shipyards, tenders and other activities.
1.1.1
Scope
This handbook provides information on cable spacing and shielding requirements for cables
described in certain military specifications, information on flexible and rigid shielding conduit, conduit
fittings and enclosures, and other pertinent information.
If it is determined, on an individual basis, that specific areas need not adhere to the guidance
of this handbook, it is recommended that the wording in the controlling document (ship specification,
ship alteration, etc.) indicate exceptions to these requirements. The spacing/shielding criteria
presented here has a sound technical basis amenable to special case situations to suit a particular
application. Special case areas of applicability should be accomplished as part of the specifications
for the task and incorporated in the design. NUWC, Newport, as authorized by NAVSEA, can provide
guidance in the special case process.
1.2
OBJECTIVE
The objective of this handbook is to ensure that electrical and electronic equipment will
operate compatibly in the shipboard electromagnetic environment. Electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC), is defined as "The condition which prevails when telecommunications (communicationelectronic) equipment is collectively performing its individual designed functions in a common
electromagnetic environment without causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to
electromagnetic interference to or from other equipment/systems in the same environment." EMC
must, of necessity, be a major consideration during ship design and equipment installation because
without EMC the warfare capability of Navy ships will be seriously reduced. The potential for
electromagnetic interference (EMI) problems has increased through the years for the following
reasons:
a.
The increased complexity and sophistication of communications, sonar, and other
electronic equipment,
b.
The increased sensitivity of, and therefore, greater susceptibility to interference to
detectors and receiving circuits,
c.
The high power levels generated and radiated by many system components, and
d.
The very high density of electronic equipment in the relatively small confined spaces in
Navy ships.
1-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
e.
1.2.1
The increasing use of commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) components and systems,
which are not typically subjected to rigorous EMC requirements dictated in MIL-STD461 (series).
Design Philosophy on Cable Spacing and Shielding
In order to meet the EMC objective, the following design philosophy on cable spacing and
shielding has been developed. See section 6 for detailed procedures.
1.3
a.
The most direct and cost-effective method of ensuring protection of susceptible cable
from unwanted energy is by cable selection and spacing, i.e., establish spacing for
cableways.
b.
Where physical constraints make it impossible to meet the necessary cable spacing
requirements, external cable shielding is required. Based on the level of shielding
required and cable category, rigid conduit (section 2) or flexible conduit (section 3) is
selected.
c.
EMC cable, conduit and cableway markings are essential in preserving the designed
cable spacing and shielding installation.
BACKGROUND
In March 1968, the original version of this handbook, identified as NAVSHIPS 0967-283-5010
(USL Report No. 603A), entitled "Handbook of Submarine Electromagnetic Shielding Practices," was
prepared by the U.S. Navy Underwater Sound Laboratory, now known as the Naval Undersea
Warfare Center (NUWC), Newport, RI.
Eventually, the name NAVSHIPS was changed to NAVSEA, and in November 1975, as part
of change 4, the basic document number was changed to NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010. In December
1976, as part of change 5, the title of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 was changed to "Handbook of
Shipboard Electromagnetic Shielding Practices" to reflect its applicability to surface ships as well as
submarines. NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 had undergone a total of five changes.
On 1 October 1982, the handbook was revised and was assigned the new identification
number, S9407-AB-HBK-010, under the NAVSEA Technical Manual Identification Numbering System
(TMINS) (Federal Stock No. 0910-LP-047-6300). The title, "Handbook of Shipboard Electromagnetic
Shielding Practices" remained unchanged. On 30 September 1989, the handbook was revised and
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 1 was issued. The title "Handbook of Shipboard Electromagnetic
Shielding Practices" remained unchanged.
1.3.1
Revision 2
This present document is the first change of, and supersedes, S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision
1 and is identified as S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 2. This handbook consists of seven sections and
six appendices. A brief description follows:
1-2
a.
Section 1 presents a general description of this handbook in terms of its purpose,
objective, and background. In addition, it describes the general content of each section
and appendix. A list of referenced documents is also included.
b.
Section 2 describes the requirements for rigid shielding conduit, conduit installation,
preparation methods, and rigid conduit couplings.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
c.
Section 3 describes general requirements for the preparation and installation of flexible
shielding conduit, both jacketed and non-jacketed, described in appendix D.
d.
Section 4 describes the requirements for the GR2000-Series fittings (braze-on type) for
use on the flexible metal shielding conduit specified in appendix D, in which the outside
diameter dimension for each nominal size of conduit is standardized.
e.
Section 5 describes the requirements for the RP2000-Series fittings (reusable type) for
use on the flexible metal shielding conduit specified in appendix D, in which the outside
diameter for each nominal size of conduit is standardized.
f.
Section 6 provides cable spacing and shielding requirements applicable to naval
shipboard installations. It categorizes cable types which are in accordance with military
specifications MIL-C-17, MIL-C-915, MIL-C-24640, and MIL-C-24643. It also specifies
the use of flexible shielding conduit described in appendix D, and for extreme EMI
problems, it specifies the use of rigid shielding conduit described in section 2. It also
provides cable marking requirements.
g.
Section 7 describes the requirements for shielding enclosures, including the method for
annealing mumetal. It also includes wiring practices and bonding and grounding
requirements. Additionally, a description of the shielding hardware used for connecting
to hull fittings is given. Guidelines for using aluminum or steel connectors and
backshells are also included in this section.
h.
Appendix A presents the cable separation and shielding requirements of section 5 of
NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 for reference purposes and, specifically, as background
information for utilizing appendix B of this handbook.
i.
Appendix B provides guidelines that deal with interface situations in which two different
sets of cable spacing and shielding requirements are implemented on the same
platform. For example, it addresses the requirements of section 5 of NAVSEA 0967LP-283-5010 and the requirements of section 6 of either NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010
or S9407-AB-HBK-010 (including Revision 2).
Although such interface situations are undesirable, they often exist and must be dealt
with. It must be kept in mind that the requirements of both systems must be satisfied at
the interface. Sometimes this results in more stringent spacing requirements than that
of either system installed independently.
j.
Appendix C contains the Qualified Products List (QPL) for the flexible shielding conduit
specified in appendix D, and certain conduit fittings specified in sections 4 and 5.
k.
Appendix D contains a specification which established new standards for flexible
shielding conduit. It describes standard dimensions and tolerances for 11 different
sizes of conduit, including minimum ID, OD over braid, and OD over jacket. Flexible
shielding conduit (nonjacketed or rubber-jacketed) is specified as the primary means of
shielding signal cables in submarines and other ships.
l.
Appendix E presents a cable comparison chart for reference purposes. It compares the
MIL-C-915 Shipboard cable types with its equivalent MIL-C-24643 Low-Smoke types,
and also with its equivalent MIL-C-24640 Lightweight types.
1-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
m.
1.3.2
Appendix F contains guidance for shielding and spacing requirements on platforms
which contain dc generating coils. These requirements are in addition to the Section 6
shielding and spacing requirements.
Document Applicability
This document is applicable for all new Navy ship construction and in new SHIPALT
installations on Navy ships. The applicable revision or change of this document to be used for new
construction is the one in effect at the signing or issuing date of the specification or contract for ship
construction. For SHIPALT installations the document to be used is the document in effect at the date
of the authorization for the development of SHIPALT installation drawings. Backfitting existing
installations in accordance with the procedures of this document should only be accomplished where
the results of EMI testing and analysis indicate that cable spacing and shielding are the appropriate
solution for a specific EMI problem.
The applicability of this document to ships which used one of the predecessor documents,
either NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 or S9407-AB-HBK-010, or a third document, the Electronics
Installation and Maintenance Book (EIMB), NAVSEA 0967-LP-000-0150, is discussed in the following
paragraphs.
a.
Section 6 of this document shall be used for SHIPALT installations in those applications
where Section 6 of either NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 or S9407-AB-HBK-010 was
previously employed. If any apparent conflicts arise between the documents, NUWC,
Newport will provide assistance in resolving the problem. The current application of
Section 6 criteria is as follows:
FF-1051/1078 Class SONAR systems (Backfit alterations)
DD963/DDG993 Class SONAR systems (Backfit alterations)
DDG 51 Class SONAR systems
CG 47 Class (CG49 and up) SONAR systems
SSBN 726 Class Command and Control area (Front half of ship)
SSN-21 Class and all succeeding New Submarine Contruction
1-4
b.
The spacing and shielding criteria of Section 6 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 is
identical to the Section 6 criteria of S9407-AB-HBK-010 (original issue). However, the
Section 6 criteria of Revision 1 was simplified with the elimination of two Radiator Cable
Designators from the spacing chart, figure 6-6. The changes in figure 6-6 are
discussed in paragraph c.
c.
The spacing chart, figure 6-6, was modified in Revision 1 because the original spacing
values for the cable designators, R1-8 and R2-8 did not follow the general increasing
trend in magnetic field characteristics which occurs as the group numbers for R1 and
R2 increase from 1 through 9. Therefore, the original values for R1-8 and R2-8 were
deleted. This resulted in two empty lines labeled R1-8 and R2-8 which were then
eliminated from the chart. The MIL-C-915 cables which were originally designated R1-8
and R2-8 were shifted to the R1-2 and R2-2 designators respectively. Also, changes
were made in the original cable types selected as model cables for cable designators
R3-1 and R3-2. The model cable for R3-1 was changed from cable type DSS-2 to
cable type 2U; the model cable for R3-2 was shifted from cable type DSS-3 to DSS-2,
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
and the model for R3-3 remained cable type DSS-4. The reason for the change was to
provide a greater range for magnetic field fall-off.
d.
Section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 provided an early criteria for cable spacing
and shielding which preceded Section 6. The criteria is included for reference in
Appendix A of this document. The use of Section 5 requirements can be identified by
cable marking suffixes, i.e., (XLL), (LL). These requirements were used on all
submarine installations and some surface ship SONAR installations not identified in
paragraph (a) above.
Installations which were made in accordance with cable spacing and shielding
requirements of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010, Section 5 should remain under those
requirements. (NOTE: The latest shielding hardware of this document may be used.)
However, where a system is to undergo a major modification, or a compartment is to be
completely gutted, it may be advantageous to consider the cable spacing and shielding
requirements of Section 6 of this document particularly if EMI problems have been
previously identified in the existing system, or in a new system which is being installed.
As an aid in the situation where interfacing is needed between the previous and current
installation requirements, the guidelines are provided in appendix B.
e.
1.4
Electronics Installation and Maintenance Book (EIMB), NAVSEA 0967-LP-000-0150,
EMI Reduction, and various specifications have provided a variety of cable separation
requirements generally used on surface ships other than for those noted in paragraph
"a." above. The use of these requirements can usually be identified by the cable
designations of "A" active (i.e., RA-RT), "S" susceptible (i.e., RS-RN), and "none" for
passive (i.e., R-RR). Cable separations made under these requirements have generally
not been effectively maintained. The requirements of Section 6 of this document shall
be used for new SHIPALT installations and where backfitting is authorized. Where
there is a conflict between the EIMB requirements and the requirements of this
document, the requirements of this document shall be used. It is intended that the
EIMB will be revised to refer to this document for all future cable separation and
shielding requirements.
LIST OF REFERENCED DOCUMENTS
The following list includes Federal and Military Specifications and Standards and other
publications and drawings that appear in the text, notes, or drawings throughout this handbook.
SPECIFICATIONS
Federal
FF-W-84
Washers, Lock (Spring)
L-P-410
Plastic, Polyamide (nylon), Rigid:
Rods, Tubes, Flats, Molded and Cast Parts
O-F-499
Flux, Brazing, (Silver Alloy, Low-melting
Point)
QQ-A-225
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bar, Rod,
Wire or Special Shapes; Rolled, Drawn or
Cold Finished; General Specification for
1-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
QQ-B-575
Braid, Wire, (Copper, Tin-Coated, or
Silver Coated, Tubular, or Flat)
QQ-B-637
Brass, Naval: Rod, Wire, Shapes, Forgings,
and Flat Products with Finished Edges
(Bar, Flat Wire, and Strip)
QQ-B-650
Brazing Alloys, Copper, Copper-Zinc,
and Copper-Phosphorous
QQ-B-654
Brazing Alloys, Silver
QQ-P-35
Passivation Treatments for CorrosionResisting Steel
QQ-P-416
Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)
QQ-S-698
Steel, Sheet and Strip, Low-Carbon
QQ-S-763
Steel Bars, Wire, Shapes, and Forgings,
Corrosion-Resisting
W-F-408
Fittings for Conduit, Metal Rigid (ThickWall and Thin-Wall (EMT) Type)
WW-C-440
Clamps, Hose, (Low-Pressure)
Military
1-6
MIL-B-857
Bolts, Nuts, Studs, and Tap-Rivets
(and Material for Same)
MIL-C-17
Cables, Radio Frequency, Flexible and
Semirigid, General Specification for
MIL-C-915
Cable and Cord Electrical, for Shipboard
Use, General Specifications for
MIL-C-5015
Connectors, Electrical, Circular Threaded,
AN Type, General Specification for
MIL-C-24231
Connectors, Plugs, Receptacles, Adapters,
and Hull Inserts, Pressure-Proof,
General Specifications for
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
MIL-C-24640
Cable, Electrical, Lightweight, for
Shipboard Use, General Specification for
MIL-C-24643
Cable and Cord, Electrical, Low Smoke, for
Shipboard Use, General Specification for
MIL-C-26482
Connectors, Electrical, (Circular,
Miniature, Quick Disconnect,
Environment Resisting), Receptacles
and Plugs, General Specifications for
MIL-C-28840(EC)
Connectors, Electrical, Circular, Threaded,
High Density, High Shock, Shipboard,
Class D, General Specification for
MIL-C-39012
Connectors, Coaxial, Radio Frequency;
General Specification for
MIL-C-81703
Connectors, Electric, Circular, Miniature,
Rack and Panel or Push-Pull Coupling,
Environment Resisting
MIL-C-83723
Connectors, Electrical, (Circular,
Environment Resisting), Receptacles
and Plugs, General Specification for
MIL-E-16400
Electronic, Interior Communication and
Navigation Equipment, Naval Ship and
Shore; General Specification for
MIL-I-631
Insulation, Electrical, Synthetic-Resin
Composition, Nonrigid
MIL-I-23053
Insulation Sleeving, Electrical,
Heat-Shrinkable, General
Specification for
MIL-P-116
Preservation - Packaging, Methods of
MIL-P-5516
Packing, Preformed, Petroleum
Hydraulic Fluid Resistant, 160°F
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
1-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
MIL-P-24691/1
Pipe and Tube, Carbon Steel, Seamless
MIL-PRF-24758A
Conduit Systems, Flexible
MIL-R-6855
Rubber, Synthetic, Sheets, Strips,
Molded or Extruded Shapes
MIL-R-46846
Rubber, Synthetic, Heat-Shrinkable
MIL-S-24149
Studs, Arc Welding, and Arc Shields
(Ferrules), General Specifications for
MIL-S-24235
Stuffing Tubes, Metal and Packing
Assemblies for Electrical Cables,
General Specification for
MIL-W-16878
Wire, Electrical, Insulated, General
Specifications for
STANDARDS
Federal
FED-STD-66
Steel, Chemical Composition and
Hardenability
Military
MIL-STD-1399 (NAVY)
Interface Standard for Shipboard Systems,
Section 300A: Electric Power,
Alternating Current (Metric)
MIL-STD-129
Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-130
Identification Marking of U.S. Military
Property
MIL-STD-461
Electromagnetic Emission and Susceptibility Requirements for the Control of
Electromagnetic Interference
MIL-STD-463
Definitions and System of Units,
Electromagnetic Interference and
Electromagnetic Compatibility
Technology
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
1-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
STANDARDS (Cont'd)
MIL-STD-1310
Shipboard Bonding, Grounding, and
Other Techniques for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety
MS3155 (NAVY)
Connector, Electric, Rear Accessory
Design Standard
Drawings
BUSHIPS Dwg No.
SSB(N)616-404-2091704
Mumetal Connection and Pull Boxes;
Assembly and Details
NAVSHIPS Dwg No.
SS(N)637 406
H 4, 316, 557
USS STURGEON Antenna Installation,
AN/BRA-29 (XU-2B)
NAVSHIPS Dwg No.
80064-302-4788653
Installation Methods for Highpermeability Flexible Conduit
Hardware
Strategic Weapons Systems
Dwg No. 3191445, Rev F
(SWS) Coordination
U.S. Navy
Underwater Sound Lab.
Dwg No. 00841D1
Stuffing Tube MX-7637/U
S9300-AW-EDG-010/EPISM
Electric Plant Installation Standard
Methods, Standard Engineering
Drawings
OTHER PUBLICATIONS
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
ANSI/ASTM-A-698
Magnetic Shield Efficiency in
Attenuating Alternating Magnetic
Fields
ANSI/ASTM-A-753
Specification for Nickel-Iron Soft
Magnetic Alloys
ANSI/ASTM-D4066
Standard Specification for Nylon Injection
and Extrusion Materials
ASTM-STD-B85
Aluminum Alloy Die Castings
ASTM-D-257
Surface Volume Resistivity
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
1-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
OTHER PUBLICATIONS(Cont'd)
SAE AMS 2404C
Electroless Nickel Plating
Government Form (Approved by Budget Bureau)
DD Form 1718
Certification of Qualified Products
National Bureau of Standards
Handbook H28
Screw-Thread Standards for Federal
Services (Parts I and II)
NUSC
Technical Memorandum No. 811123, Dated 15 December 1981 Section-6,
Shipboard Cable Spacing and Shielding Requirements: Supplemental Computer
Program for HP85 Computer
NUSC
CONFIDENTIAL Technical Memorandum No. 871161, Dated 2 Sept 1988
"Equipment Design-Performance Sensitivity and Other Data for Existing
Government Furnished Equipment Aboard SSN and SSBN Ships" (U).
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
1-10
SECTION 2
RIGID SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 2
RIGID SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.4.1
2.4.2
2.4.3
2.5
2.5.1
2.5.2
2.5.3
2.5.4
2.5.5
2.6
2.6.1
2.6.2
Page
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................
RIGID CONDUIT SPECIFICATION............................................................................
RIGID CONDUIT INSTALLATION..............................................................................
Nontopside and Topside Use of Rigid Conduit.......................................................
Grounding Requirements for Rigid Conduit............................................................
Shock and Vibration Protection ..............................................................................
RIGID CONDUIT (PIPE) PREPARATION ..................................................................
Cutting Rigid Conduit..............................................................................................
Bending Rigid Conduit ...........................................................................................
Cleaning Rigid Conduit ...........................................................................................
Conduit (Pipe) Threads ..........................................................................................
Torque Requirements.............................................................................................
RIGID CONDUIT COUPLINGS ..................................................................................
Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Rigid Conduit ...........................................................
Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Flexible Conduit .......................................................
2-1
2-1
2-1
2-2
2-2
2-2
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-4
2-6
2-6
2-6
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
2-1
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
Page
Methods of Grounding Rigid Conduit .....................................................................
Rigid Metal Conduit Coupling Attached to Conduit.................................................
Rigid Metal Conduit Coupling .................................................................................
Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Flexible Conduit .......................................................
Male Ferrule, Used with Flexible Metal Conduit .....................................................
2-3
2-5
2-5
2-7
2-8
LIST OF TABLES
Table
2-1
Page
Carbon Steel Pipe (MIL-P-24691/1) .......................................................................
2-2
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
2-i/2-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 2
RIGID SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
2.1
INTRODUCTION
The rigid shielding conduit described in this section consists of carbon steel pipe (MIL-P24691/1) used as conduit for electromagnetic shielding of cables. The conduit can be used for the
purpose of either protecting enclosed cables from external radiation, or for attenuating
electromagnetic radiation emitted by enclosed cables.
While rigid conduit is less expensive to buy, installation is generally more expensive than
flexible shielding conduit specified in appendix D because it must be installed by a skilled pipe-fitter.
Also, rigid conduit is much heavier than flexible conduit. For example, the 3/4-inch rigid conduit, at
1.32 pounds per foot, is four times heavier than typical 3/4-inch ID nonjacketed conduit at 0.33 pound
per foot, and is over two-and-a-half times heavier than typical 3/4-inch ID jacketed flexible conduit at
0.50 pound per foot.
Although at frequencies above 200 Hz the shielding effectiveness of an infinite length of rigid
conduit is higher than that of an infinite length of flexible conduit (see figure 6-7), when actual
installations were examined, it was found that the flexible magnetic installation was less susceptible to
magnetic fields because it had fewer end fittings than the rigid conduit installation. The major problem
with rigid metal conduit is that it is much more difficult to run rigid metal conduit so that the areas of
reduced shielding caused by the connector, transition fittings, and adapters are located in low
magnetic flux regions. In addition, if the field levels are too high and the shield of the conduit is not
enough to protect the system cables, it is a lot easier and less expensive to move flexible conduit than
rigid conduit.
For the reasons mentioned, flexible conduit is preferred over rigid conduit except in those
cases where flexible conduit does not provide adequate shielding (see paragraph 6.7). For existing
installations of rigid conduit, the policy of NAVSEA is to let the conduit remain as installed. However,
in cases where repairs or modifications to the installed rigid conduit are required, the flexible conduit
(where adequate) shall be substituted for the rigid conduit.
2.2
SCOPE
This section describes specification requirements for the rigid shielding conduit, conduit
installation, preparation methods, and rigid conduit couplings.
2.3
RIGID CONDUIT SPECIFICATION
Rigid metal conduit used as an electromagnetic shield for cables shall be carbon steel pipe in
accordance with specification MIL-P-24691/1, "Pipe and Tube, Carbon Steel, Seamless." The pipe
shall have a nominal wall thickness of not less than 0.120 inch. See table 2-1 for sizes and types.
Reprinted without change
2-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table 2-1. Carbon Steel Pipe (MIL-P-24691/1)
Pipe Size
Nominal ID
(inches)
Grade
Per
MIL-P-24691/1
1/4
3/8
1/2
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
A
A
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
2.4
2.4.1
Min Wall
Thickness
(inches)
0.120
0.126
0.147
0.154
0.179
0.191
0.200
0.218
0.276
0.300
OD
(inches)
0.540
0.675
0.840
1.050
1.315
1.660
1.900
2.375
2.875
3.500
Thread Size
NPSM
(threads/in.)
Minimum
Torque
(lb-ft)
1/4 - 18
3/8 - 18
1/2 - 14
3/4 - 14
1 - 11-1/2
1-1/4 - 11-1/2
1-1/2 - 11-1/2
2 - 11-1/2
2-1/2 - 8
3-8
25
25
50
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
RIGID CONDUIT INSTALLATION
Nontopside and Topside Use of Rigid Conduit
The rigid conduit described herein is intended for submarine and non-topside use to provide
cable shielding against cable-to-cable and equipment-to-cable coupling. Conduit employed for
topside use is addressed by MIL-STD-1310 and is intended to provide shielding from electromagnetic
pulse (EMP) and radiating antennas. (The MIL-STD-1310 definition for conduit includes circular tube
or pipe and square or rectangular sheet-metal trunks which enclose cables for shielding protection.)
2.4.2
Grounding Requirements for Rigid Conduit
The shielding effectiveness provided by rigid conduit, against a magnetic field caused by
structure current flowing on its outer surface, is proportional to the number of "skin depths" in the
conduit wall material. This is discussed in detail in paragraph 7.3.2 of section 7. In most cases the
0.120-inch minimum wall thickness of the rigid conduit provides sufficient attenuation: approximately
30 dB at 200 Hz. This will give adequate protection against structure-current effects. Protection
increases exponentially with frequency and effectively shields the internal cables from EMI caused by
structure current flowing on the conduit.
In view of the preceding characteristics, rigid conduit shall be grounded in accordance with
MIL-STD-1310. It states that conduits 10 feet or longer shall be bonded to ground potential at a point
not greater than 5 feet from each end. It also states that class "B" bonding is acceptable; however,
where it is not inherent in the installation of the conduit, bond straps are required. Figure 2-1
illustrates the methods of grounding by means of bond straps.
Grounding conduit at more than one point along its run constitutes "multiple-point grounding."
This term includes inadvertent grounding of conduit as well as intentional grounding of conduit that is
installed in accordance with approved plans. Although multiple-point grounding of the conduit is the
recommended configuration, isolation of the conduit from the equipment cabinet may be necessary to
reduce structure-current flow on the cabinet and its effect on susceptible equipment housed therein.
(See figure 5-20, "RP 2440 Adapter, Nonmetallic" for isolation of conduit-end from its termination).
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
2-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 2-1a.
Method of Grounding Rigid Conduit
Supported by Pipe Block Hangers
Figure 2-1b. Methods of Grounding Rigid Conduit Supported by Pipe Strap Hangers
Notes:
1. USE TYPE IV BOND STRAP IAW MIL-STD-1310 (NAVY).
2. USE STUD AND NUT METHOD IAW MIL-STD-1310 (NAVY) FOR ATTACHING NONWELDED BOND
STRAPS.
Figure 2-1. Methods of Grounding Rigid Conduit
2-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Where a hybrid (a combination of rigid and flexible) conduit installation requires single-point
grounding, the flexible conduit end opposite the rigid conduit must be isolated from ground at both
ends of the cable run. The rigid conduit provides the single-point ground. Multiple grounds along the
rigid conduit portion of the run are acceptable.
2.4.3
Shock and Vibration Protection
The blast effect following the explosion of a bomb, torpedo, depth charge, etc., is devastating
and widespread. Moreover, such explosions are often followed by destructive waves of vibration.
Accordingly, piping and associated equipment installations should be designed to be shock and
vibration resistant. Brittle materials such as cast iron should not be used for fittings. Piping should not
run in direct contact with decks or bulkheads, but rather should be cushioned by rubber-padded pipe
hangers. The rigid conduit should be terminated with approximately 30 inches or less of the flexible
conduit described in section 3 to absorb shock and vibration at the point of entry to an equipment
enclosure, a bulkhead stuffing tube, or a hull fitting. Conduit fittings and methods described in this
handbook shall be used for coupling the rigid conduit to the flexible conduit, and for attaching the
flexible conduit to connectors, stuffing tubes, and hull fittings.
2.5
2.5.1
RIGID CONDUIT (PIPE) PREPARATION
Cutting Rigid Conduit
Pipe ends shall be cut square with a hacksaw or metal-cutting bandsaw. Burrs shall be
removed by reaming or filing.
2.5.2
Bending Rigid Conduit
Any acceptable pipe bending method that will not deform the inside diameter of the pipe may
be used.
2.5.3
Cleaning Rigid Conduit
After all machining, welding, and brazing operations are completed, the exterior and interior
surfaces of the pipe shall have all rust or visible corrosion products and flux removed, and shall be
thoroughly cleaned of grease, oil, and dirt by solvent wiping, vapor degreasing, caustic washing and
rinsing, or other effective methods.
2.5.4
Conduit (Pipe Threads)
This conduit (pipe) shall be threaded with NPSM threads (American Standard straight pipe
threads for mechanical joints). Straight pipe threads are required to mate with such mechanical
assemblies as the rigid conduit coupling illustrated in figure 2-2. Also, straight pipe threads are more
suited for mechanical assemblies since adjustments can be made between threaded parts and
secured by use of a locknut. NPSM thread sizes for various pipe sizes are listed in table 2-1.
2.5.5
Torque Requirements
A mechanically tight coupling on threaded steel pipe fittings normally requires a minimum
torque as shown in table 2-1. A locknut shall be used with threaded pipe and fittings when the
threaded joint is such that the minimum torque requirement cannot be achieved. The torque
requirements of joints that include threads of MS- and UG-type connectors and conduit fittings
described in this handbook shall be tightened to manufacturer's specifications. See S9300-AW-EDG010/EPISM for MS connector backshell torque values.
2-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 2-2. Rigid Metal Conduit Coupling
Attached to Conduit
Notes:
1. THE MANUFACTURES LISTED ABOVE ARE SUGGESTED SOURCES. ANY EQUIVALENT COUPLING IN
ACCORDANCE WITH FEDERAL SPECIFICATION W-F-408 IS ACCEPTABLE.
2. THE MALE FERRULE (FIGURE 2-5) IS SUBSTITUTED FOR THE NIPPLE FOR COUPLING RIGID
CONDUIT TO FLEXIBLE CONDUIT.
3. THOMAS & BETTS CO. IDENTIFIES THIS TYPE OF COUPLING AS THEIR “ERICSON COUPLING”.
Figure 2-3. Rigid Metal Conduit Coupling
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
2-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
2.6
2.6.1
RIGID CONDUIT COUPLINGS
Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Rigid Conduit
Figure 2-2 illustrates the relative positions of the components of a coupling used for joining
two lengths of rigid metal conduit. Figure 2-3 shows a sketch of the three components of the rigid
metal conduit coupling and includes a list of suggested sources.
2.6.2
Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Flexible Conduit
Figure 2-4 shows the hardware required to join rigid metal conduit to flexible metal conduit.
The table lists the coupling components used with various sizes of rigid and flexible conduit. Note that
in this assembly the male ferrule (figure 2-5) is used in place of the nipple supplied as part of the rigid
metal conduit coupling (figure 2-3). The male ferrule is brazed to the flexible metal conduit and the
assembly is joined using the same torque requirements for rigid conduit coupling. This assembly
provides the transition from rigid conduit to the short lengths of flexible conduit at terminal points in the
cable run.
Reprinted without change
2-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
1/4
Notes:
1. AN OPTIONAL METHOD OF COUPLING RIGID CONDUIT TO FLEXIBLE CONDUIT IS THE RP2210
COUPLING DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
2-4. Coupling for Rigid Conduit to Flexible Conduit
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
2-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Notes:
1. MATERIAL: AISI-TYPE LOW-CARBON, COLD-ROLLED STEEL PER FED. STD. NO. 66, HAVING
CHEMICAL COMPOSITIONS WITHIN THE FOLLOWING RANGES:
CARBON
MANGANESE
PHOSPHOROUS
SULPHUR
LEAD
(C)
(Mn)
(P)
(S)
(Pb)
.08% TO .25% MAX
.25% TO 1.15% MAX
.04% TO .12% MAX
.05% TO .35% MAX
.15% TO .35% MAX
2. FINISH: CADMIUM PLATING, PER QQ-P-416, TYPE I, CLASS 3.
3. ALL DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
4. BREAK ALL SHARP EDGES.
Figure 2-5.
Reprinted without change
2-8
Male Ferrule, Used with Flexible
Metal Conduit
SECTION 3
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 3
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1
3.4.2
3.4.3
3.4.4
3.4.5
3.4.6
3.4.7
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
Page
BACKGROUND ..........................................................................................................
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................
REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURING AND GOVERNMENT ACCEPTANCE
OF FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT .......................................................................
Specification for Flexible Shielding Conduit ...........................................................
Qualified Products List............................................................................................
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION .......................................................................
Nontopside and Topside Use of Flexible Conduit ..................................................
Grounding Requirements for Flexible Conduit .......................................................
Shielding Effectiveness of Flexible Conduit............................................................
Partial Shielding of Cable .......................................................................................
Bonding and Grounding Methods ...........................................................................
Termination and Coupling of Type 2 Conduit .........................................................
Selection of Flexible Conduit Size ..........................................................................
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT PREPARATION.......................................................................
Cleaning Flexible Conduit.......................................................................................
Forming Flexible Conduit........................................................................................
Cutting Flexible Conduit..........................................................................................
Silver Brazing Fittings to Conduit............................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-1
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-2
3-3
3-3
3-3
3-4
3-4
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-8
3-10
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
3-1
3-2
3-3
Page
Method of Grounding Flexible Conduit .......................................................................
Type IV Bond Strap Fabrication Details ......................................................................
Method of Preparing Conduit for Brazing and Cutting ................................................
3-5
3-6
3-9
LIST OF TABLES
Table
3-1
Page
Conduit Dimensions (Inches)......................................................................................
3-7
3-i/3-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 3
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS
3.1
BACKGROUND
The use of flexible shielding conduit as a means of achieving EMC was made a requirement
in October 1969 in section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010.
The specification for the flexible shielding conduit (also effective October 1969) was
presented in appendix 1 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010. It listed 10 conduit sizes and established the
dimensions for minimum inside diameter for each size. However, there were no restrictions placed on
the dimensions for the outside diameters, and as a result of this lack of standardization, the outside
diameter of any particular size of conduit varied from manufacturer to manufacturer. Similarly, the
sizes of fittings designed to terminate or couple the conduit varied with each manufacturer, so that the
fittings from one manufacturer would not necessarily fit conduit from another manufacturer.
To ensure that a fitting would fit and function properly on a particular size conduit, both the
fitting and the conduit had to be obtained from the same manufacturer. Thus, a separate supply of
fittings would be necessary to fit conduit made by each individual manufacturer.
A new specification for flexible shielding conduit, presented in appendix D, establishes
standard dimensions for the outside diameters (in addition to other requirements) so that fittings made
by a qualified manufacturer would fit conduit made by any qualified manufacturer.
3.2
SCOPE
This section identifies and describes the specifications and procedures for the purchase and
installation of high permeability flexible shielding conduit. Procedures include those that relate to
bonding, grounding, and handling of this type conduit.
3.3
REQUIREMENTS FOR MANUFACTURING AND GOVERNMENT ACCEPTANCE OF
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
The purpose of this conduit is to shield low-level signal cables from the influence of external
magnetic fields. It can also be used, within saturation limits of the conduit material, to reduce
magnetic field radiation from power and transmitting cables. The primary frequencies of interest are
those below 100 kHz. For this conduit to effectively perform its intended functions, its electrical and
physical properties must be maintained throughout the manufacturing process. The specifications
and quality control requirements identified in this section are intended to ensure this result.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
3-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
3.3.1
Specification for Flexible Shielding Conduit
Appendix D of this document contains a specification that is invoked on flexible shielding
conduit purchased for use by the Navy. The specification provides detailed requirements that cover
the following types of conduit:
Type 1 conduit. Type 1 nonjacketed conduit is used in installations where ground or
structureborne currents are minimal along the path of the conduit, or where the cable being
shielded is not susceptible to interference from current flow on the conduit. (Conduit can
become a conductor for ground or structureborne currents through contacts with ground
potentials along the length of the conduit.)
Type 2 conduit. Type 2 rubber-jacketed conduit is used for shielding an extremely low level,
low frequency signal cable which would be susceptible to interference from current flowing on
the conduit. The rubber jacket prevents this current flow by electrically insulating the conduit
from unintentional ground contacts.
3.3.2
Qualified Products List
A qualified products list for flexible conduit for low frequency shielding is maintained for Navy
procurement purposes (see appendix C). It provides information concerning flexible conduit which
meets the requirements of the specification in appendix D. Manufacturers wishing to have their
products tested for qualification should submit samples in accordance with the instructions contained
in this specification. Conduit which is tested shall meet the requirements of appendix D in order to be
approved by NAVSEA and to be added to the qualified products list.
3.4
3.4.1
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT INSTALLATION
Nontopside and Topside Use of Flexible Conduit
The flexible shielding conduit described herein is intended for submarine and nontopside use
to provide cable shielding against magnetic field cable-to-cable and equipment-to-cable coupling.
Requirements for flexible conduits which are approved as cable shields for EMI and electromagnetic
pulse (EMP) protection in a ship's topside area are listed in MIL-STD-1310.
3.4.2
Grounding Requirements for Flexible Conduit
The shielding effectiveness provided by flexible shielding conduit, against structure current
flowing on its outer surface, is proportional to the number of "skin depths" in the conduit wall material.
This is described in detail in paragraph 7.3.2 of section 7. As frequency is lowered, the 0.008-inch
wall thickness of typical, high permeability, flexible shielding conduit provides only one "skin depth"
(8.686 dB of attenuation) at approximately 2 kHz. At 10 kHz approximately 20 dB of shielding is
provided by this conduit. The 20-dB value represents the minimum amount of protection required for
most shielding applications. It is for this reason that single-point grounding of the conduit, to reduce
structure-current flow, is required below 10 kHz for S4-1, S4-2 and S4-3 cable categories. Singlepoint grounding requires the use of Type 2 (rubber-jacketed) conduit in which the rubber-jacket
insulates the conduit from unintentional ground contacts. A Type IV bond strap in accordance with
MIL-STD-1310 is required for grounding the conduit. (See figure 5-20, "RP2440 Adapter, Nonmetallic" for isolation of conduit-end from its termination.
Reprinted without change
3-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
The determination of the best grounding configuration of magnetic shielding conduit (both
rigid and flexible) for frequencies between 10 kHz and 100 kHz, normally requires a case-by-case
engineering analysis by NUWC, Newport, for example, as authorized by NAVSEA. With the absence
of this analysis, it is recommended the installation drawings be followed. If there is not direction on
the drawings concerning the grounding configuration, the following recommendation will provide the
highest probability of attaining EMC:
•
For cable categories S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S2-1, S2-2, S2-3, S4-1, S4-2 and S4-3, use a
single-point ground configuration. These are the most sensitive cable categories and
would be susceptible if there were sufficient currents flowing on the conduit.
•
For cable categories other than S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S2-1, S2-2, S2-3, S4-1, S4-2 and S43, use a multiple-point ground configuration. These cable categories are less
susceptible to the current amplitudes which, experience has revealed, exist on the
conduit. For these cable categories, it is not technically cost-effective to implement the
single-point ground in an all-inclusive manner.
At frequencies above 100 kHz, where approximately 70 dB of attenuation is provided against
structure current, multiple-point grounding of the conduit is recommended for reasons of economy,
ease of installation, and to reduce coupling problems caused by standing waves. The term "multiplepoint grounding", as used in this document, includes inadvertent grounding of conduit as well as
intentional grounding of conduit installed in accordance with existing plans. Note that multiple-point
grounding allows the use of Type 1 (unjacketed) conduit installed in accordance with MIL-STD-1310.
3.4.3
Shielding Effectiveness of Flexible Conduit
The shielding effectiveness of flexible shielding conduit against magnetic fields is somewhat
greater than just the penetration loss provided against structure current as described in paragraph
3.4.2. In addition to the penetration loss, there exists another loss that is dependent upon the
direction of the magnetic field incident on the conduit. This loss is maximum for flux approaching
perpendicular to the conduit axis and minimum for that approaching parallel to the axis. In practice,
the field is neither uniform nor does it approach the conduit axis at precisely zero or 90 degrees.
Therefore, there is always a penetration loss plus some additional loss due to these boundary
conditions.
The total shielding effectiveness exhibited by the conduit was determined empirically and is
presented in figure 6-7 of this document. Provided that the grounding requirements of paragraph
3.4.2 are observed, this is the shielding effectiveness that can be expected in practice.
3.4.4
Partial Shielding of Cable
Flexible shielding conduit may be used to enclose a portion of a cable run as an alternative to
enclosing the entire cable run. The subject of partial shielding of cables is addressed in paragraph
6.7.1 of section 6.
3.4.5
Bonding and Grounding Methods
Shipboard bonding and grounding methods for flexible shielding conduit shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-1310 which states that the method of bonding requires the use of a Type IV
bond strap. One end of the bond strap is attached to the conduit braid by means of a hose clamp
(with worm-gear adjustment), and the other end is attached, typically, to a stud at ground potential.
(See figures 3-1 and 3-2.)
For single-point grounding, the rubber jacket of Type 2 conduit shall be cut away to expose
the braid at the area to be grounded in order to facilitate attaching the bond strap.
3-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
For multiple-point grounding, the unjacketed conduit (Type 1) greater than 10 feet in length
shall be bonded to ground potential at a point not greater than 5 feet from each end. Class "B"
bonding is acceptable; however, where it is not inherent in the installation of the conduit, the Type IV
bond straps are required.
3.4.6
Termination and Coupling of Type 2 Conduit
A Type 2 conduit installation must be insulated from the ground plane except at a single point
specified in the installation drawings. The following installation procedures are provided to ensure that
inadvertent grounding of the conduit does not occur.
3.4.7
a.
Couplings: When two lengths of Type 2 conduit are to be coupled by means of an RP2200 or GR-2127 coupling, the rubber jacket must be cut back a sufficient amount to
allow for metal-to-metal contact. The resulting joint must then be enclosed in heatshrinkable tubing (per appendix D), or in a heat-shrinkable sleeve such as the "shrinkaround sleeve" made by Sigmaform Corp., or equivalent. Note: The tubing or sleeve
may also be used to cover damaged rubber jacket, providing the conduit itself is
undamaged.
b.
End-fittings: As with couplings, the rubber jacket must be cut back to allow for metal-tometal contact between conduit and fitting. If insulation is required the assembly should
be covered with the heat-shrinkable tubing or sleeve mentioned above.
Selection of Flexible Conduit Size
The following paragraphs are presented as an aid in selecting the appropriate size flexible
conduit for shielding a particular cable.
3-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Notes:
1. GROUNDING METHOD IAW MIL-STD 1310 (NAVY).
2. BOND STRAP SHALL BE TYPE IV EXCEPT ONE END SHALL NOT HAVE PROVISIONS FOR STUD OR
BOLT MOUNTING. AREA WHERE BOND STRAP IS HELD AGAINST CONDUIT SHALL BE CLEAR AND
FREE OF ANY NONCONDUCTIVE MATERIALS.
3. ALL BOND STRAP CONTACT AREAS SHALL BE COATED WITH ANTISEIZE COMPOUND OF MIL-T22361.
4. BOND STRAPS MAY BE ENCASED IN CLEAR PLASTIC PVC TUBING.
Figure 3-1. Method of Grounding Flexible Conduit
3-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Notes:
1. TYPE IV BONDING STRAPS FABRICATED IAW MIL-STD 1310 (NAVY).
2. TYPE IV BONDING STRAPS FABRICATED FROM FLAT COPPER BRAID (1/2” MIINIMUM WIDTH) OF QQB-575. PROVISIONS FOR INSTALLATION OF THE BRAID STRAP SHALL BE BY ONE OF THE
FOLLOWING METHODS:
A. BY INSTALLING WIRE TERMINALS ON EACH END OF THE BRAID.
B. BY SOLDER DIPPING THE ENDS OF THE BRAID THEN DRILLING MOUNTING HOLES.
C. BY SOLDERING FLAT COPPER TUBING OR STRIPS ON EACH END OF THE BRAID THEN DRILLING
MOUNTING HOLES.
Figure 3-2. Type IV Bond Strap Fabrication Details
3-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
a.
It should be noted that conduit supplied in long lengths is made up of several short
lengths joined together by welding or brazing, and the inside diameter (ID) at each joint
(or splice) is reduced by a maximum of 0.028 inches. This reduction is caused by a
coupling ring (maximum wall thickness of ring = 0.014 inch) used as part of the
manufacturer's method of joining conduit. If the 0.028 inch reduction in diameter at
each joint will cause a clearance problem between a cable outside diameter (OD) and
the intended conduit size, then the intended conduit is, obviously, too small.
Table 3-1 contains the 11 sizes of conduit specified in appendix D, the conduit ID
(minimum), and the minimum ID at a conduit joint.
Table 3-1. Conduit Dimensions (Inches)
Conduit
Size
(nom ID)
Conduit
ID
(min)
ID at
Joint (min)
(conduit ID
minus 0.028)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
0.245
0.370
0.495
0.620
0.745
0.995
1.245
1.495
1.995
2.495
2.995
0.217
0.342
0.467
0.592
0.717
0.967
1.217
1.467
1.967
2.467
2.967
b.
One approach to determining a conduit size is the general rule of thumb used by one of
the shipyards, which states that if a cable OD approaches 90 percent of a conduit ID,
the next larger size conduit should be selected to facilitate installation. Consider, for
example, a cable OD which is 90 percent of a 5/8-inch conduit ID. The same cable in
the next larger size conduit (3/4-inch) is 75 percent of the conduit ID. Another example
is that of a cable OD which is 90 percent of a 3/4-inch conduit ID. This cable in the next
larger size conduit (1-inch) is 67 percent of the conduit ID.
c.
In addition to the rule of thumb, the various installation methods of shielding cable, as
well as conditions at the installation site, such as length of cable run and number of
bends along the run, should be considered in determining the amount of clearance
required between cable OD and conduit ID.
For example, one method used where cable has been previously inserted into the
conduit elsewhere, is to install the cable and conduit as a unit. Another method
involves installing the conduit first, and then pulling the cable through the conduit. This
method might be used where the weight and length of a cable/conduit unit would cause
handling difficulties. The bend radius of the cable and the number of bends should be
considered in determining the required clearance. This method would normally require
more clearance than the previous method. A cable shielded in this manner can also be
readily replaced, if necessary.
Another method of shielding a long cable run, at the installation site, is to use several
short lengths of conduit (such as 20 to 30 feet each). The first length of conduit is
slipped over the long cable, then a reusable-type conduit-coupling is used to join the
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
3-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
first length of conduit to the second length of conduit. This method of adding couplings
and conduit is continued until the entire cable run is shielded.
d.
3.5
Because of the variables present in the installation of cable and conduit, as mentioned
above, there is no hard and fast rule for determining conduit size for a particular cable.
However, the goal should be to use the smallest conduit that will satisfy all the
necessary requirements for clearance between cable and conduit.
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT PREPARATION
The following instructions specify preinstallation procedures for flexible shielding conduit.
3.5.1
Cleaning Flexible Conduit
The flexible metal conduit is both air and liquid tight. Prior to shipment from the manufacturer,
the inner and outer surfaces of the flexible metal conduit are cleaned to remove oil and foreign matter,
the ends are capped, and the conduit is coiled and wrapped in rust inhibitor paper or sealed in a
plastic bag, which should not be removed until the conduit is needed for assembly.
If Type 1 or Type 2 conduit becomes contaminated by oil or foreign matter, it should be
recleaned by any process or combination of processes which will accomplish thorough cleaning
without damage to the metal or the rubber jacket. Also, any drying procedure shall not be injurious to
the metal or the rubber jacket.
3.5.2
Forming Flexible Conduit
Due to the tight braid construction of the conduit, it should be formed into the approximate
contour of its intended run before cutting. This will ensure the flexibility desired for the installation.
3.5.3
Cutting Flexible Conduit
a.
Prior to cutting Type 1 conduit, the braid in the area where the cut is to be made
should be silver-soldered or brazed to prevent flaring of the braid during and after the cut (see figure
3-3). Where brazing is not feasible, the area should be covered tightly with an appropriate tape during
cutting.
WARNING
Silver-brazing alloy contains cadmium, and poisonous fumes may be
formed on heating. Do not breathe fumes. Use only with an
adequate ventilation device, such as a fume collector, exhaust
ventilator, or air-supplied respirator.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
3-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Notes:
1. ATTACH A HOSE CLAMP TO EITHER SIDE OF THE AREA TO BE BRAZED OR SILVER SOLDERED.
THESE HOSE CLAMPS HOLD THE BRAID FIRMLY AGAINST THE CONVOLUTED TUBING TO CONTROL
THE OD OVER THE BRAID. THEY ALSO ACT AS A HEAT SINK FOR THE CONDUIT.
2. CUT CONDUIT SQUARELY, THEN REMOVE HOSE CLAMPS EITHER BEFORE OR AFTER SMOOTHING
THE CONDUIT ENDS.
3. TO PREPARE A CONDUIT END FOR BRAZING OR SILVER SOLDERING, ATTACH A SINGLE HOSE
CLAMP AT THE APPROPRIATE DISTANCE FROM THE CONDUIT END.
Figure 3-3. Method of Preparing Conduit for Brazing and Cutting
Reprinted without change
3-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
3.5.4
b.
Prior to cutting Type 2 conduit, cut through the rubber jacket around the conduit with an
appropriate knife at the point where the final cut through the metal is to be made. Peel
back the jacket away from each side of the location of the cut as much as practicable
to avoid damage to the jacket caused by heat from silver-soldering or brazing. Silversolder or braze as in step a above. Where brazing is not feasible, the rubber jacket at
the area of the cut should be covered tightly with an appropriate tape during cutting.
c.
Cut the conduit squarely with a high speed knife-edge saw or with a hacksaw having a
fine-toothed blade.
d.
Snip off any loose strands from the braid, and remove all burrs and sharp edges from
the inner core of the conduit.
Silver Brazing Fittings to Conduit
Flexible metal conduit can be terminated or coupled by certain steel fittings (listed in this
handbook) which are best attached by silver brazing. A silver-base brazing alloy (having 34-36
percent silver), in accordance with Federal Specification WW-B-654, Grade VIII, or equivalent, is
recommended. Either a 1/16-inch or a 1/8-inch diameter rod, determined by conduit size, should be
adequate for all joints. The brazing flux (a white, water-soluble paste), in accordance with Federal
Specification 0-F-499, Type B, or equivalent, is recommended for use with the above-mentioned
brazing rod.
WARNING
Silver-brazing alloy contains cadmium, and poisonous fumes may be
formed on heating. Do not breathe fumes. Use only with an adequate
ventilation device, such as a fume collector, exhaust ventilator, or airsupplied respirator.
Before silver-brazing, all surfaces to be joined must be cleaned. Wash off all grease and oil
with a good solvent. The flux should be applied evenly with a brush to the contact surfaces of both
the conduit and the fitting.
The oxyacetylene process is preferred for the manual brazing operation, using a neutral to
reducing flame. Apply heat to the fitting, never to the braid, until the flux boils, turns a powdery white,
and then becomes transparent. Filler rod, which can be prefluxed, is then added starting at the
hottest point with the tip of the flame always on the rod or fitting and working around the
circumference. Fitting and conduit should be brazed in a vertical position, where practicable, with the
fitting below the conduit. After a fillet has been made, the torch flame is played on the fitting uniformly
so that the silver braze is drawn into the joint.
After brazing, while the parts are still hot, the flux should be removed by washing in hot water
greater than 125°F (the hotter, the better), wiping with a wet swab, brushing with a wet brush, or
brushing with a wire brush. Thorough drying after flux removal is required.
It should be noted that while silver-brazing is an approved method for flexible metal conduit to
be terminated or coupled, it is not the only method that can be utilized to perform these functions.
Low temperature tin lead soldering is an example of another acceptable method that can be used.
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
3-10
SECTION 4
GR2000 SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(BRAZE-ON TYPE)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 4
GR2000-SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (BRAZE-ON TYPE)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.2.1
4.5
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.5.3
4.5.4
4.5.5
4.5.6
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.7
4.7.1
4.7.2
4.7.3
4.7.4
4.8
4.8.1
4.8.2
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.12.1
4.13
Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS .........................................................................................
LIST OF TABLES........................................................................................................
BACKGROUND ..........................................................................................................
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS......................................................................................
Issues of Documents..............................................................................................
Other Publications ..................................................................................................
CONSTRUCTION.......................................................................................................
Function..................................................................................................................
Dimensions.............................................................................................................
Minimum Wall Thickness .......................................................................................
MATERIALS................................................................................................................
Components Material .............................................................................................
End-Fitting (GR2126) and Ferrule (GR2129) Material ...........................................
Conduit Coupling (GR2127) Material .....................................................................
Joining Material.......................................................................................................
O-ring Gasket Material ...........................................................................................
Isolator Adapter (GR2130) Material........................................................................
FINISH ........................................................................................................................
Finish for Low-Carbon Steel Fittings ......................................................................
Finish for CRES Fittings .........................................................................................
Finish for Conduit Coupling (GR2127) ...................................................................
PERFORMANCE ........................................................................................................
Mechanical .............................................................................................................
Moisture Sealing .....................................................................................................
Cable Protection .....................................................................................................
Tensile and Compressive ...........................................................................................
QUALIFICATION ........................................................................................................
Qualification............................................................................................................
Application for Qualification ....................................................................................
DEVIATIONS ..............................................................................................................
SOURCES ..................................................................................................................
QUALITY ASSURANCE .............................................................................................
TRANSITION AND ACCESSORY FITTINGS ............................................................
Data Sheets ............................................................................................................
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS, CONDUIT TO GR2125 FITTINGS ............................
4-ii
4-ii
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-1
4-2
4-2
4-2
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-4
4-5
4-4
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-5
4-i
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
4-1
4-2
4-3
4-4
4-5
4-6
4-7
4-8
4-9
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
Page
GR2120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015 Connector ................................................
GR2121 Enclosure Fitting...........................................................................................
GR2122 90° Elbow, Non-Environmental (Style A) ......................................................
GR2122 90° Elbow, Environmental (Style B)..............................................................
GR2123 Transition Fitting for Bulkhead Stuffing Tube ...............................................
GR2124 Transition Fitting for MS Series Backshell....................................................
GR2125 Transition Fitting for Triaxial Connector .......................................................
GR2126 End Fitting for Flexible Conduit ....................................................................
GR2127 Conduit Coupling ..........................................................................................
GR2128 Panel Fitting..................................................................................................
GR2129 Ferrule and Coupling Nut for Flexible Conduit .............................................
GR2130 Isolator Adapter ............................................................................................
Assembly Instructions - Flexible Conduit to Triaxial
Connector using a GR2125 Transition Fitting.............................................................
4-6
4-10
4-11
4-12
4-13
4-15
4-17
4-19
4-20
4-21
4-22
4-23
4-25
LIST OF TABLES
Table
4-1
4-ii
Page
GR2000-Series Transition and Accessory Fittings .....................................................
4-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 4
GR2000-SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (BRAZE-ON TYPE)
4.1
BACKGROUND
The original specification and drawings for the GR2000-Series fittings appeared in appendix 2
and section 5, respectively, of NAVSHIPS 0967-283-5010, dated 15 October 1969. These original
fittings were designed to fit the flexible shielding conduit described in appendix 1 of the same
document which did not specify a standard outside diameter dimension for each size of conduit. As a
result, the outside diameter varied with each manufacturer, thus requiring several sizes of fitting to
accommodate each nominal size of conduit.
4.2
SCOPE
This specification describes GR2000-Series transition fittings and accessory fittings to be
used on the flexible metal shielding conduit specified in appendix D, in which the dimension of the
outside diameter for each nominal size of conduit is standardized.
The use of the GR2000-Series or the RP2000-Series fittings (described in section 5) is
optional. However, for most installations the RP2000-Series fittings are preferred because they
require no brazing for installation on the conduit, and a greater selection of adapters is available.
4.3
4.3.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Issues of Documents
The following documents, of the issue in effect on date of invitation for bids or request for
proposal, form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein.
SPECIFICATIONS
Federal
QQ-B-650
Brazing Alloy, Copper, Copper-Zinc,
and Copper Phosphorous
QQ-P-35
Passivation Treatments for
Corrosion-Resisting Steel
QQ-P-416
Plating, Cadmium (Electrodeposited)
QQ-S-763
Steel Bars, Wire, Shapes, and Forgings,
Corrosion-Resisting
Military
MIL-P-5516
Packing, Preformed, Petroleum Hydraulic
Fuid Resistant, 160:F
4-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
STANDARDS
Federal
FED-STD-66
Steel, Chemical Composition, and
Hardenability
Military
MIL-STD-129
Marking for Shipment and Storage
MIL-STD-130
Identification Marking of U.S. Military
Property
(Copies of specifications, standards, drawings, and publications required by contractors in connection
with specific procurement functions should be obtained from the procuring activity or as directed by
the contracting officer.)
4.3.2
Other Publications
The following documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. Unless
otherwise indicated, the issue in effect on date of invitation for bids or request for proposal shall apply.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
SAE AMS 2404C
Electroless Nickel Plating
National Bureau of Standards
Handbook H28
4.4
4.4.1
Screw-Thread Standards for Federal
Services (Parts I & II)
CONSTRUCTION
Function
A transition fitting provides the physical connection between flexible metal conduit and an
electrical connector or fitting. An accessory fitting provides the physical connection between flexible
conduit and a bulkhead or panel, and provides the means for coupling two lengths of conduit together.
This type of transition fitting requires the use of a stainless-steel cylindrical end-fitting which is
brazed directly to the braid of the flexible conduit. The other components of the transition fitting are
then attached to the end-fitting with a ferrule which operates by friction. The assembly is made
watertight by O-ring seals.
By comparison, the RP2000-Series reusable fittings (described in section 5) utilize a ferrule
which grips the conduit braid directly by friction, and does not provide for a watertight assembly.
4-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
4.4.2
Dimensions
All dimensions and tolerances specified on the drawings listed in table 4-1 are mandatory
except as noted in paragraph 4.8 (Deviations).
4.4.2.1
Minimum Wall Thickness
The minimum wall thickness for the body of the GR2120, GR2123, GR2124, and GR2125
fittings shall be 1/16 inch.
4.5
4.5.1
MATERIALS
Components Material
All components of the fittings, except for the GR2126 end-fitting and the GR2129 ferrule, shall
be made of mild steel, AISI type B1113, or any AISI-type low-carbon, hot- or cold-rolled steels, in
accordance with FED-STD-66, having chemical compositions within the following ranges:
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Lead
4.5.2
(C)
(Mn)
(P)
(S)
(Pb)
0.08% to 0.25% max
0.25% to 1.15% max
0.04% to 0.12% max
0.05% to 0.35% max
0.15% to 0.35% max
End-Fitting (GR2126) and Ferrule (GR2129) Material
The GR2126 end-fitting and GR2129 ferrule shall be made of corrosion-resisting steel
(CRES), 300 series, in accordance with QQ-S-763.
4.5.3
Conduit Coupling (GR2127) Material
The GR2127 conduit coupling shall be made of low-carbon steel (see paragraph 4.5.1).
4.5.4
Joining Material
Any joining material shall have the basic alloy content of the parts being joined. Brazing
material shall be in accordance with QQ-B-650 for FS class joints.
4.5.5
O-ring Gasket Material
O-ring gaskets that are part of fittings shall be in accordance with MIL-P-5516, Class B.
4.5.6
Isolator Adapter (GR2130) Material
The GR2130 isolator adapter shall be made of nylon (see table 11, figure 4-12).
4-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
4.6
4.6.1
FINISH
Finish for Low-Carbon Steel Fittings
Finish for components made of low-carbon steel shall be a nickel coating in accordance with
ANSI/ASTM-2404C.
4.6.2
Finish for CRES Fittings
Parts made of 300-Series CRES shall be passivated in accordance with QQ-P-35.
4.6.3
Finish for Conduit Coupling (GR2127)
Finish for GR2127 conduit coupling shall be a cadmium plating in accordance with QQ-P-416,
Type I, Class 3.
4.7
4.7.1
PERFORMANCE
Mechanical
The body of a transition fitting shall telescope over the conduit end-fitting (GR2126) to allow
room for cable termination. Assembly of parts shall not place any torque or tensile loads on the
transition fitting.
4.7.2
Moisture Sealing
Where moisture sealing or splashproof conditions are required, an O-ring gasket of material
specified in 4.5.5 shall be provided as part of the transition fitting to seal each critical joint.
Where moisture sealing is not a requirement, O-ring gaskets may be omitted from transition
fittings. However, such omission shall not impair the mechanical performance of the assembly.
4.7.3
Cable Protection
The fitting shall have smooth inner surfaces free of sharp burrs or edges that could abrade
the insulation or shield of a cable.
4.7.4
Tensile and Compressive
All transition fittings and end-fittings shall withstand, without slippage, a tensile load of 50
pounds applied between fitting and conduit for 1 minute. Also, such fittings shall withstand, without
slippage, a compressive load of 50 pounds applied between fitting and conduit for 1 minute.
4.8
4.8.1
QUALIFICATION
Qualification
Manufactures' designs for transition-fittings must be approved by the Navy. Qualification tests
are not required for accessory fittings, but they must be manufactured in accordance with this
specification. Manufacturers who are interested in having their designs approved should follow the
procedure listed below. Samples sent for testing should be addressed to the Naval Undersea
Warfare Center, EMC Branch, Code 3431, Newport, RI 02841-1708. Approval of the GR2120,
GR2123, GR2124 and GR2125 transition fittings will be based on conformity of the fitting to the
characteristics outlined in this specification and on any other factors which may affect intended
4-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
performance. The Navy reserves the right to require that sample fittings be made available for testing
in all sizes the manufacturer wishes to have approved. No indebtedness between the U.S.
Government and any manufacturer will be incurred in connection with these qualification tests. Test
samples and drawings shall be shipped prepaid by the manufacturer and will not be returned.
4.8.2
Application for Qualification
Manufacturers shall submit to NUWC, EMC Branch, Code 3431, Newport, RI 02841-1708 a
sample 3/4-inch size GR2000-series transition-fitting installed on a 1-foot length of conduit (identified
by manufacturers name and part number). In addition, drawings showing construction details of all
sizes of the GR2000 transition-fittings shall be submitted. The drawings shall be numbered and dated
for reference purposes.
4.9
DEVIATIONS
Deviations from paragraphs 4.5, 4.6, and 4.11 will be considered if shielding performance can
be met by modifications of material, finishes, or mechanical design, provided that the form, fit, and
function requirements of this specification are met. Samples of such mechanical fittings must be
submitted to the Naval Undersea Warfare Center, EMC Branch, Code 3431, Newport, RI 02841-1708
for test and approval. Complete details of all parameters affected by the modification must
accompany the sample.
4.10
SOURCES
The GR2120, GR2123, GR2124, and GR2125 transition fittings must be obtained only from
the qualified sources listed in the Qualified Products List, appendix C. The other GR2000 Series
fittings may be obtained from any source which manufactures them in accordance with this
specification.
4.11
QUALITY ASSURANCE
It will be the responsibility of the procuring activity to determine the acceptability of a transition
fitting.
4.12
TRANSITION AND ACCESSORY FITTINGS
Table 4-1 lists the transition and accessory fittings used with flexible metal conduit.
4.12.1
Data Sheets
The following data sheets (figures 4-1 through 4-12) form a part of this specification. They
include assembly drawings, tables of appropriate data, and part-number development information.
4.13
ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS, CONDUIT TO GR2125 FITTING
The instructions shown in figure 4-13 describe the procedure for terminating flexible metal
conduit used for shielding a coaxial cable connected to a triaxial connector. The GR2125 fitting
provides the transition between the conduit and the connector. (Dimensions in figure 4-13 are in
inches.)
4-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table 4-1. GR2000-Series Transition and Accessory Fittings
Figure No.
Basic Part No.
DESCRIPTION
4-1
GR2120
Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015 Connectors
4-2
GR2121
Enclosure Fitting
4-3
GR2122
90° Elbow, Non-Environmental (Style A)
4-4
GR2122
90° Elbow, Environmental (Style B)
4-5
GR2123
Transition Fitting for Bulkhead Stuffing Tube
4-6
GR2124
Transition Fitting for MS Series Backshell
4-7
GR2125
Transition Fitting for Triaxial Connector
4-8
GR2126
End Fitting for Flexible Conduit
4-9
GR2127
Conduit Coupling
4-10
GR2128
Panel Fitting
4-11
GR2129
Ferrule and Coupling Nut for Flexible Conduit
4-12
GR2130
Isolator Adapter
GR2120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015 Connector
Figure 4-1. GR21120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 1 of 4)
4-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2120 Continued
TABLE I
CONNECTOR
Conn.
Shell
Size
8S
8S
8
10S
10S
10SL
10SL
12S
12S
14S
16S
12
12
14
16
18
20
20
22
24
28
32
32
36
36
36
36
40
40
44
48
48
Conn.
Symbol
(See Table
III)
L
H
JMN
HJLN
M
MN
HJI
LN
HJM
HJLMN
HJLMN
LN
HM
HLMN
HJLMN
HJLMN
J
HLMN
HJLMN
HJLMN
HJLMN
LMN
HJ
L
J
MN
H
L
HMN
HN
N
H
ADAPTER END
A Thread
Class 2B
3/8 - 32 UNEF
7/16 - 27 UNS
7/16 - 28 UNEF
1/2 - 28 UNEF
9/16 - 24 UNEF
9/16 - 24 UNEF
7/16 - 28 UNEF
5/8 - 24 UNEF
5/8 - 24 UNEF
11/16 - 24 UNEF
3/4 - 20 UNEF
7/8 - 20 UNEF
5/8 - 24 UNEF
11/16 - 24 UNS
7/8 - 20 UNEF
1 - 20 UNEF
1-1/8 - 24 UNS
1-1/8 - 18 UNEF
1-1/4 - 18 UNEF
1-3/8 - 18 UNEF
1-5/8 - 18 UNEF
1-7/8 - 16 UN
1-29/32 - 18 UNS
2-1/16 - 16 UN
2-1/16 - 20 UNEF
2-1/8 - 16 UN
2-1/8 - 18 UNS
2-5/16 - 16 UN
2-3/8 - 16 UN
2-5/8 - 16 UN
2-13/16 - 18 UNS
2-7/8 - 16 UN
B Dia.
+ 0.010
- 0.020
0.562
0.625
0.625
0.687
0.687
0.687
0.812
0.812
0.812
0.937
1.062
0.812
0.812
0.937
1.062
1.187
1.312
1.312
1.437
1.562
1.812
2.062
2.062
2.312
2.312
2.312
2.312
2.562
2.562
2.875
3.125
3.125
Figure 4-1. GR2120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 2 of 4)
4-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2120 Continued
TABLE II
STANDARD SIZE CONDUIT
CONDUIT
PART
NUMBER
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
CONDUIT
SIZE
(Nom. ID)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
OD
(Over Braid)
C
Dia.
0.420.01
0.540.01
0.690.01
0.820.01
0.940.01
1.250.01
1.500.01
1.750.01
2.280.015
2.780.015
3.280.015
0.25
0.38
0.50
0.62
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
TRANSITION FITTING
END-FITTING
NUT
D
F
E
Max.
+.010
.005
-.000
1.03
0.530
0.450
1.23
0.650
0.570
1.36
0.800
0.720
1.59
0.930
0.850
1.73
1.050
0.970
1.91
1.360
1.280
2.28
1.610
1.530
2.66
1.860
1.780
3.17
2.395
2.315
3.97
2.895
2.815
4.35
3.395
3.315
Figure 4-1. GR2120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 3 of 4)
4-8
DASH
NO.
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2120 Continued
Table III
MIL-C-5015 CONNECTOR
SYMBOL
MFR.
CLASS
DESCRIPTION
H
AMPHENOL
A
MS 3100, MS3101, MS3106, 97-3100, 97-3101,
97-3106
J
AMPHENOL
E,R
MS 3100, MS3101, MS3106, 69-3100, 69-3101,
69-3106
L
BENDIX
A,E,R
MS 3100, MS3101, MS3106, 10-214, 10-720, 10726
M
CANNON
A
MS 3100, MS3101, MS3106
N
CANNON
E,R
MS 3100, MS3101, MS3106, (CAO1, CAO6)
Notes:
1. MATERIAL: LOW CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING, PER SAE AMS 2404C,
EXCEPT END FITTING SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. STANDARD MINIMUM LENGTH IS 2 INCHES FOR ONE-PIECE (STYLE A), AND 2.5 INCHES FOR TWOPIECE (STYLE B).
3. WHEN CONDUIT OD EXCEEDS ID OF CONNECTOR SHELL, A TWO-PIECE FITTING STYLE B), WILL BE
SUPPLIED.
4. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
5. DISCARD CONNECTOR REAR HARDWARE.
6. BASIC PART NO. WITHOUT O-RING IS GR2120, BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RING IS GRO2120
7. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-1. GR2120 Transition Fitting for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 4 of 4)
Reprinted without change
4-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2121 Enclosure Fitting
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C.
2. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
3. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
4. ACCORDING TO NBS HANDBOOK H28, THE AMERICAN NATIONAL THREAD SERIES (N) HAS BEEN
SUPERSEDED BY THE UNITED THREAD SERIES (UN). THESE INCLUDE THE NEF AND NS THREAD
SIZES IN TABLE I WHICH ARE RETAINED FOR USE WITH CONNECTORS HAVING NEF AND NS
THREADS.
Figure 4-2. GR2121 Enclosure Fitting
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-10
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2122 90º Elbow, Non-Environmental (Style A)
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C.
2. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
3. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-3. GR2122 90° Elbow, Non-Environmental
(Style A)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-11
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2122 90º Elbow, Non-Environmental (Style B)
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C.
2. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
3. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
4. AMPHENOL, BENDIX, AND CANNON “A” CLASS CONNECTORS, AND SHELL SIZE “10SL” OF CANNON
“E, R” CLASS CONNECTORS SHOULD NOT BE SELECTED FOR ENVIRONMENTAL ASSEMBLY.
Figure 4-4. GR2122 90° Elbow, Environmental
(Style B)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-12
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2123 Transition Fitting for Bulkhead Stuffing Tube
Figure 4-5. GR2123 Transition Fitting for Bulkhead
Stuffing Tube (Sheet 1 of 2)
Reprinted without change
4-13
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2123 Continued
TABLE II
STANDARD SIZE CONDUIT
CONDUIT
PART
NUMBER
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
CONDUIT
SIZE
(Nom. ID)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
OD
(Over Braid)
C
Dia.
0.42±0.01
0.54±0.01
0.69±0.01
0.82±0.01
0.94±0.01
1.25±0.01
1.50±0.01
1.75±0.01
2.28±0.015
2.78±0.015
3.28±0.015
0.25
0.38
0.50
0.62
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
TRANSITION FITTING
END-FITTING
NUT
E
F
D
+.010
±.005
Max.
-.000
0.450
0.530
1.03
0.570
0.650
1.23
0.720
0.800
1.36
0.850
0.930
1.59
0.970
1.050
1.73
1.280
1.360
1.91
1.530
1.610
2.28
1.780
1.860
2.66
2.315
2.395
3.17
2.815
2.895
3.97
3.315
3.395
4.35
DASH
NO.
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C EXCEPT END FITTING SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. STANDARD MINIMUM LENGTH IS 3 INCHES FOR ONE-PIECE (STYLE A), AND 3.5 INCHES FOR TWOPIECE (STYLE B).
3. WHEN CONDUIT OD EXCEEDS “A” DIAMETER, A TWO-PIECE (STYLE B) WILL BE SUPPLIED.
4. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
5. DISCARD STUFFING-TUBE GLAND NUT.
6. BASIC PART NO. WITHOUT O-RINGS IS GR2123
BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RINGS IS GRO2123
7. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
8. THE AMERICAN NATIONAL THREAD SERIES (N) HAS BEEN SUPERSEDED BY THE UNITED THREAD
SERIES (UN). THE “N” THREAD SIZES LISTED IN TABLE I ARE RETAINED FOR USE WITH THOSE
ITEMS WHICH HAVE “N” THREADS.
Figure 4-5. GR2123 Transition Fitting for Bulkhead
Stuffing Tube (Sheet 2 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-14
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2124 Transition Fitting for MS Series Backshell
Figure 4-6. GR2124 Transition Fitting for MS Series
Backshell (Sheet 1 of 2)
Reprinted without change
4-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2124 Continued
TABLE II
STANDARD SIZE CONDUIT
CONDUIT
PART
NUMBER
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
CONDUIT
SIZE
(Nom. ID)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
OD
(Over Braid)
C
Dia.
0.42±0.01
0.54±0.01
0.69±0.01
0.82±0.01
0.94±0.01
1.25±0.01
1.50±0.01
1.75±0.01
2.28±0.015
2.78±0.015
3.28±0.015
0.25
0.38
0.50
0.62
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
TRANSITION FITTING
END-FITTING
NUT
E
F
D
+.010
±.005
Max.
-.000
0.450
0.530
1.03
0.570
0.650
1.23
0.720
0.800
1.36
0.850
0.930
1.59
0.970
1.050
1.73
1.280
1.360
1.91
1.530
1.610
2.28
1.780
1.860
2.66
2.315
2.395
3.17
2.815
2.895
3.97
3.315
3.395
4.35
DASH
NO.
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C EXCEPT END FITTING SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. STANDARD MINIMUM LENGTH IS 2 INCHES FOR ONE-PIECE (STYLE A), AND 2.5 INCHES FOR TWOPIECE (STYLE B).
3. WHEN CONDUIT OD EXCEEDS ID OF CONNECTOR SHELL, A TWO-PIECE (STYLE B) WILL BE
SUPPLIED.
4. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
5. BASIC PART NO. WITHOUT O-RINGS IS GR2124
BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RINGS IS GRO2124
6. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-6. GR2124 Transition Fitting for MS Series
Backshell (Sheet 2 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-16
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2125 Transition Fitting for Triaxial Connector
Figure 4-7. GR2125 Transition Fitting for Triaxial Connector (Sheet 1 of 2)
Reprinted without change
4-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2125 Continued
TABLE II
STANDARD SIZE CONDUIT
CONDUIT
PART
NUMBER
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
CONDUIT
SIZE
(Nom. ID)
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
OD
(Over Braid)
C
Dia.
0.42±0.01
0.54±0.01
0.69±0.01
0.82±0.01
0.94±0.01
1.25±0.01
1.50±0.01
1.75±0.01
2.28±0.015
2.78±0.015
3.280.015
0.25
0.38
0.50
0.62
0.75
1.00
1.25
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
TRANSITION FITTING
END-FITTING
NUT
E
F
D
+.010
±.005
Max.
-.000
0.450
0.530
1.03
0.570
0.650
1.23
0.720
0.800
1.36
0.850
0.930
1.59
0.970
1.050
1.73
1.280
1.360
1.91
1.530
1.610
2.28
1.780
1.860
2.66
2.315
2.395
3.17
2.815
2.895
3.97
3.315
3.395
4.35
DASH
NO.
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE AMS
2404C EXCEPT END FITTING SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. STANDARD MINIMUM LENGTH IS 2 INCHES FOR ONE-PIECE (STYLE A), AND 2.5 INCHES FOR TWOPIECE (STYLE B).
3. WHEN CONDUIT OD EXCEEDS ID OF CONNECTOR SHELL, A TWO-PIECE (STYLE B OR C) WILL BE
SUPPLIED.
4. ASSEMBLY IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130.
5. BASIC PART NO. WITHOUT O-RINGS IS GR2125
BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RINGS IS GRO2125
6. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-7. GR2125 Transition Fitting for Triaxial Connector (Sheet 2 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-18
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2126 End Fitting for Flexible Conduit
Notes:
1. MATERIAL SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. IDENTIFY PER MIL-STD-130.
3. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-8. GR2126 End Fitting for Flexible Conduit
4-19
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2127 Conduit Coupling
Notes:
1. MATERIAL: LOW CARBON STEEL WITH CADMIUM PLATING PER QQ-P-416.
2. IDENTIFY PER MIL-STD-130.
3. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
PART NUMBER DEVELOPMENT
Example:
Basic Part No.
Conduit Part No. (See Table)
GR2127-EM06
EM06
Figure 4-9. GR2127 Conduit Coupling
4-20
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2128 Panel Fitting
±
-
2 .5 0 0
Notes:
1. BODY MATERIAL SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES PASSIVATED.
2. LOCKNUT MATERIAL SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER
SAE AMS 2404C.
3. IDENTIFY PER MIL-STD-130.
4. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-10. GR2128 Panel Fitting
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-21
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2129 Ferrule and Coupling Nut for Flexible Conduit
Notes:
1. FERRULE MATERIAL SHALL BE CRES, 300 SERIES, PASSIVATED.
2. COUPLING NUT SHALL BE LOW-CARBON STEEL WITH ELECTROLESS NICKEL COATING PER SAE
AMS 2404C.
3. THE “A” THREADS TO BE PERFECT TO WITHIN 0.094 INCHES FROM BOTTOM. NO THREAD RELIEF
AT INNER END PERMITTED.
4. IDENTIFY PER MIL-STD-130.
5. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
6. THE AMERICAN NATIONAL THREAD SERIES (N) HAS BEEN SUPERSEDED BY THE UNITED THREAD
SERIES (UN). THE “NS” THREAD SIZES LISTED IN TABLE I ARE RETAINED FOR USE WITH THOSE
ITEMS WHICH HAVE “NS” THREADS.
7. THE GR2129-EM06 ASSEMBLY COUPLES 3/4-INCH CONDUIT TO THE STUFFING-TUBE ADAPTER,
FIGURE 7-11 IN SECTION 7.
Figure 4-11. GR2129 Ferrule and Coupling Nut for
Flexible Circuit
Reprinted without change
4-22
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2130 Isolator Adapter
TABLE I
BASIC
MATES WITH GR 2000 SERIES
A THREAD
B DIA
CLASS 2B
± .02
CLASS 2A
√
3/8-32 UNEF
0.69
3/8-32 UNEF
√
√
7/16-27 UNS
0.75
7/16-27 UNS
√
√
7/16-28 UNS
0.75
7/16-28 UNS
PART NO
2120
GR2130-01
√
GR2130-02
GR2130-03
GR2130-04
√
GR2130-05
√
GR2130-06
√
GR2130-07
√
2121
√
2122
2123
√
2124
2125
2129
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
GR2130-08
GR2130-09
√
√
√
√
GR2130-10
√
√
√
√
GR2130-11
√
√
√
√
√
1/2-28 UNEF
0.82
1/2-28 UNEF
9/16-24 UNEF
0.88
9/16-24 UNEF
5/8-24 UNEF
0.94
5/8-24 UNEF
11/16-24 UNEF
1.00
11/16-24 UNEF
3/4-16 UNEF
1.06
3/4-16 UNEF
√
3/4-20 UNEF
1.06
3/4-20 UNEF
√
7/8-20 UNEF
1.19
7/8-20 UNEF
√
1-20 UNEF
1.31
1-20 UNEF
1-1/16-18 UNEF
1.38
1-1/16-18 UNEF
√
GR2130-12
C THREAD
GR2130-13
√
1-1/8-12 UN
1.44
1-1/8-12 UN
GR2130-14
√
1-1/8-14 N
1.44
1-1/8-14 N
1-1/8-18 UNEF
GR2130-15
√
√
1-1/8-18 UNEF
1.44
GR2130-16
√
√
1-1/8-24 UNS
1.44
1-1/8-24 UNS
1-3/16-18 UNEF
1.50
1-3/16-18 UNEF
√
GR2130-17
GR2130-18
√
√
√
GR2130-19
√
GR2130-20
√
GR2130-21
√
√
√
GR2130-22
√
√
√
GR2130-23
GR2130-24
√
√
√
√
GR2130-25
√
√
√
GR2130-26
1-1/4-18 UNEF
1.56
1-1/4-18 UNEF
1-288-14 UNEF
1.60
1-288-14 UNEF
1-5/16-12 UN
1.63
1-5/16-12 UN
1-3/8-18 UNEF
1.69
1-3/8-18 UNEF
1-7/16-18 UNEF
1.75
1-7/16-18 UNEF
1-5/8-12 UN
1.94
1-5/8-12 UN
1-5/8-18 UNEF
1.94
1-5/8-18 UNEF
1-3/4-18 NS
2.06
1-3/4-18 NS
1-3/16-12 UN
1-3/16-12 UN
2.13
GR2130-27
√
√
1-7/8-16 UN
2.19
1-7/8-16 UN
GR2130-28
√
√
1-29/32-18 UNS
2.22
1-29/32-18 UNS
GR2130-29
√
√
√
√
2-18 NS
2.31
2-18 NS
GR2130-30
√
2.025-11-1/2 N
2.34
2.025-11-1/2 N
GR2130-31
√
2-1/16-12 UN
2.38
2-1/16-12 UN
Figure 4-12. GR2130 Isolator Adapter (Sheet 1 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-23
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
GR2130 Continued
TABLE I (Continued)
BASIC
MATES WITH GR 2000 SERIES
PART NO
2120
2121
2122
GR2130-32
√
√
GR2130-33
√
√
GR2130-34
√
√
GR2130-35
√
√
2124
2125
2129
√
√
GR2130-36
√
GR2130-37
√
√
GR2130-38
GR2130-39
√
√
GR2130-40
√
√
√
GR2130-41
GR2130-42
2123
√
√
√
B DIA
CLASS 2B
± .02
C THREAD
CLASS 2A
2-1/16-16 UN
2.38
2-1/16-16 UN
2-1/16-20 UNEF
2.38
2-1/16-20 UNEF
2-1/8-16 UN
2.44
2-1/8-16 UN
2-1/8-18 UNS
2.44
2-1/8-18 UNS
2-1/4-11-1/2 N
2.56
2-1/4-11-1/2 N
2-1/4-16 UN
2.56
2-1/4-16 UN
2-5/16-12 UN
2.63
2-5/16-12 UN
2-5/16-16 UN
2.63
2-5/16-16 UN
√
2-3/8-16 UN
2.69
2-3/8-16 UN
√
2-1/2-16 UN
2.81
2-1/2-16 UN
√
2-5/8-16 UN
2.94
2-5/8-16 UN
2-11/16-12 UN
3.00
2-11/16-12 UN
√
GR2130-43
A THREAD
GR2130-44
√
√
2-13/16-18 UNS
3.13
2-13/16-18 UNS
GR2130-45
√
√
2-7/8-16 UN
3.19
2-7/8-16 UN
√
GR2130-46
GR2130-47
√
√
√
GR2130-48
√
3-12 UN
3.31
3-12 UN
3-16 UN
3.31
3-16 UN
3-1/8-1/2 UN
3.44
3-1/8-1/2 UN
GR2130-49
3-3/8-16 UN
3.69
3-3/8-16 UN
GR2130-50
3-7/8-16 UN
4.19
3-7/8-16 UN
1.35
3/4-14 NPSM
GR2130-51
√
3/4-14 NPSM
GR2130-52
√
1-11-1/2 NPSM
1.61
1-11-1/2 NPSM
GR2130-53
√
1-1/4-11-1/2
NPSM
1.95
1-1/4-11-1/2
NPSM
GR2130-54
√
2-1/2-8 NPSM
3.15
2-1/2-8 NPSM
GR2130-55
√
3-8 NPSM
3.78
3-8 NPSM
Notes:
1. THE GR2130 ISOLATOR ADAPTER IS MADE OF A NON-CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL TO ELECTRICALLY
INSULATE THE GR2000 SERIES FITTINGS FROM THE ASSOCIATED CONNECTORS, BACKSHELLS,
STUFFING-TUBES, ETC.
2. BASIC PART NO. WITHOUT O-RINGS IS GR2125
BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RINGS IS GRO2125
3. ADAPTERS NUMBERED GR2130-51 THROUGH GR2130-55 HAVE NPSM THREADS (STRAIGHT PIPE
THREADS FOR MECHANICAL JOINTS).
4. PARTS IDENTIFIED PER MIL-STD-130
5. DIMENSIONS IN INCHES.
Figure 4-12. GR2130 Isolator Adapter (Sheet 2 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
4-24
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
1. TIN THE END OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT LIGHTLY AND CUT OFF RAGGED PORTION WITH A HACKSAW.
2. PLACE END FITTING OVER FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND SILVER SOLDER IN PLACE. HOLD END FITTING AND
CONDUIT VERTICALLY WHEN SOLDERING TO PREVENT EXCESS SOLDER FROM RUNNING BACK ONTO
THE CONDUIT AND INTRODUCING UNWANTED STIFFNESS
BASIC PART NO. WITH O-RINGS IS GRO2125
3. ADAPTERS NUMBERED GR2130-51 THROUGH GR2130-55 HAVE NPSM THREADS (STRAIGHT PIPE
THREADS FOR MECHANICAL JOINTS).
4. SLIDE COUPLING NUT, TAPERED FERRULE, AND TRANSITION BODY OVER CABLE AND FLEXIBLE
CONDUIT AS SHOWN IN VIEW B.
5. PLACE ADAPTER, FLAT WASHER, NYLON INSULATOR, NUT, FLAT WASHER, AND GASKET OVER CABLE.
6. CUT CABLE JACKET BACK 1/4 INCH EXPOSING BRAID.
7. PLACE BRAID CLAMP OVER BRAID AND PUSH BACK AGAINST CABLE JACKET.
8. COMB OUT BRAID AND FOLD BRAID WIRES EVENLY AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE OF BRAID CLAMP TO
ENSURE GOOD ELECTRICAL CONTACT.
9. TRIM BRAID TO PROPER LENGTH AS SHOWN IN VIEW C.
Figure 4-13. Assembly Instructions - Flexible Conduit
to Triaxial Connector Using a GR2125 Transition
Fitting Room (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-25
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
10. CUT DIELECTRIC BACK 1/8 INCH EXPOSING COPPER CONDUCTOR.
11. SOLDER MALE CONTACT TO CENTER CONDUCTOR. REMOVE ANY EXCESS SOLDER FROM THE
CONTACT WITH A FILE OR KNIFE.
12. PLACE TRIAXIAL CONNECTOR INNER BODY OVER MALE CONTACT AND BRAID CLAMP. SLIDE RUBBER
GASKET AND FLAT WASHER INTO BODY AND TIGHTEN NUT IN PLACE. SCREW ADAPTER ONTO
TRANSITION BODY. SEE VIEW E..
13. HOLD TRANSITION BODY IN ONE HAND AND PULL BACK ON FLEXIBLE CONDUIT UNTIL BACK END OF
END FITTING EXTENDS APPROXIMATELY 1/2 INCH BEYOND THE MALE THREADED END OF THE
TRANSITION BODY. SLIDE THE TAPERED FERRULE INTO PLACE AND TIGHTEN COUPLING NUT ONTO
BODY.
14. PLACE NYLON INSULATOR OVER INNER BODY, THEN SLIDE OUTER BODY INTO PLACE AND TIGHTEN AS
REQUIRED.
15. ASSEMBLE FITTINGS ON OTHER END OF FLEXIBLE CONDUIT BEING SURE TO PREDETERMINE THE
CABLE LENGTH AND THE POSITION OF THE END FITTING WITHIN THE TRANSITION BODY. SEE VIEW F.
Figure 4-13. Assembly Instructions - Flexible Conduit
to Triaxial Connector Using a GR2125 Transition
Fitting Room (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-26
SECTION 5
RP2000 SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT
(REUSABLE TYPE)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 5
RP2000-SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (REUSABLE TYPE)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.8
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.10.4
5.11
5.11.1
5.11.2
5.12
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ..........................................................................................
LIST OF TABLES.........................................................................................................
BACKGROUND ...........................................................................................................
SCOPE.........................................................................................................................
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.......................................................................................
Issues of Documents.............................................................................................
Other Publications .................................................................................................
CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................
Function.................................................................................................................
Basic Construction.................................................................................................
Conduit-Gripping Mechanism ................................................................................
Overlap Length ......................................................................................................
Minimum ID ...........................................................................................................
Knurl Length ..........................................................................................................
Standard Thread Sizes..........................................................................................
MATERIALS.................................................................................................................
Material for Most Fittings .......................................................................................
Optional Material for RP2330 ................................................................................
Optional Material for RP2350 ................................................................................
Material for RP2440...............................................................................................
FINISH .........................................................................................................................
Finish for Steel Fittings ..........................................................................................
Finish for Aluminum Fitting....................................................................................
WORKMANSHIP .........................................................................................................
Welding or Brazing ................................................................................................
Cable Protection ....................................................................................................
MARKING ....................................................................................................................
PERFORMANCE .........................................................................................................
Welding Restriction ...............................................................................................
Tensile and Compressive Load Tests ...................................................................
QUALIFICATION .........................................................................................................
Qualification...........................................................................................................
Application for Qualification ...................................................................................
Deviations..............................................................................................................
Sources .................................................................................................................
PREPARATION FOR DELIVERY................................................................................
Identification Label.................................................................................................
Packaging..............................................................................................................
DATA SHEETS FOR FITTINGS AND ADAPTERS.....................................................
Page
5-ii
5-ii
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-i
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
5-21
5-22
5-23
Page
RP2100 Conduit End Fitting, Straight ..........................................................................
RP2110 Conduit End Fitting, 90° .................................................................................
RP2120 Conduit End Fitting, 45° .................................................................................
RP2130 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Panel .........................................................................
RP2140 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thread (Tapered)..............................................
RP2141 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thread (Straight)...............................................
RP2200 Coupling, Conduit-to-Conduit.........................................................................
RP2210 Coupling, Conduit-to-Pipe ..............................................................................
RP2311 Adapter for MIL-C-5015 Connector................................................................
RP2321 Adapter for Triaxial Connector .......................................................................
RP2330 Adapter for Coaxial Connector.......................................................................
RP2340 Adapter for MIL-C-26482 Connector..............................................................
RP2350 Adapter for MS3155-Type Connectors ..........................................................
RP2360 Adapter for MIL-C-28840(EC) Backshell .......................................................
RP2400 Adapter for MIL-S-24235/1 Stuffing Tube ......................................................
RP2411 Adapter for Miscellaneous Threaded Fittings ................................................
RP2420 Adapter for MIL-C-24231 Hull Fitting .............................................................
RP2430 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Tapered)................................................................
RP2431 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Straight).................................................................
RP2440 Adapter, Nonmetallic......................................................................................
RP2500 Adapter for Panel Termination .......................................................................
RP2610 Adapter, 90° ...................................................................................................
RP2620 Adapter, 45° ...................................................................................................
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-18
5-19
5-22
5-24
5-26
5-28
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
LIST OF TABLES
Table
5-1
5-2
5-ii
Page
RP2000-Series Fittings ................................................................................................
Standard Thread Sizes for End-Fittings and Adapters ................................................
5-3
5-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 5
RP2000-SERIES FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE CONDUIT (REUSABLE TYPE)
5.1
BACKGROUND
The original specification for RP2000-Series fittings appeared in appendix 3 of NAVSHIPS
0967-283-5010, dated 5 October 1972. These original fittings were designed to fit the flexible
shielding conduit specified in appendix 1 of the same document, which did not specify a standard
outside diameter dimension for each size of conduit. As a result, the outside diameter varied with
each manufacturer, and the fittings made by a particular manufacturer were designed to fit their
conduit only.
5.2
SCOPE
This specification describes RP2000-Series fittings to be used on the flexible metal shielding
conduit specified in appendix D, in which the dimension of the outside diameter for each nominal size
of conduit is standardized.
The fittings described in this section are attached to the conduit by gripping the conduit braid
directly by means of friction and do not provide a watertight assembly. By comparison, the GR2000Series (described in section 4) requires that a component of the fitting be brazed directly to the conduit
braid. The assembly is made watertight by means of O-ring seals. For most installations the
RP2000-Series fittings are preferred.
5.3
5.3.1
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
Issues of Documents
The following documents, of the issue in effect on date of invitation for bids or request for
proposal, form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein.
SPECIFICATIONS
Federal
L-P-410
Plastic, Polyamide (nylon), Rigid:
Rods, Tubes, Flats, Molded and
Cast Parts
QQ-A-225
Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Bar,
Rod, Wire or Special Shapes;
Rolled, Drawn or Cold Finished;
General Specification for
STANDARDS
Federal
FED-STD-66
Steel, Chemical Composition and
Hardenability
5-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Military
MIL-STD-130
Identification Marking of U.S.
Military Property
MS3155 (NAVY)
Connector, Electric, Rear Accessory
Design Standard
(Copies of specifications, standards, drawings, and publications required by contractors in connection
with specific procurement functions should be obtained from the procuring activity or as directed by
the contracting officer.)
5.3.2
Other Publications
The following documents form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein.
Unless otherwise indicated, the issue in effect on date of invitation for bids or request for proposal
shall apply.
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
5.4
ANSI/ASTM-D4066
Standard Specification for Nylon Injection
and Extrusion Materials
ASTM-STD-B85
Aluminum Alloy Die Castings
SAE AMS 2404C
Electroless Nickel Plating
National Bureau of Standards
Handbook H28
Screw-Thread Standards for Federal
Services (Parts I & II)
CONSTRUCTION
5.4.1
Function
The RP2000-Series reusable fittings provide a method of joining connectors, applicable hull
fittings, and similar devices to flexible shielding conduit. There are three basic types in this series:
5-2
a.
An end fitting, which is attached to a conduit and provides a standard thread size for
attaching adapters;
b.
A coupling, which typically joins two lengths of conduit; and
c.
An adapter, which provides thread compatibility between an endfitting and various devices such as connectors and hull fittings.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
The term "reusable" means that an end fitting or coupling can be readily attached to or
removed from conduit simply by tightening or loosening a gripping mechanism.
Table 5-1 lists the RP2000-Series fittings. These fittings are illustrated in the data sheets (see
paragraph 5.12).
Table 5-1. RP2000-Series Fittings
Type
Fig.
No.
Basic
Part No.
Description
End Fittings
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
5-6
RP2100
RP2110
RP2120
RP2130
RP2140
RP2141
Conduit End Fitting, Straight
Conduit End Fitting, 90°
Conduit End Fitting, 45°
End Fitting, Conduit-to-Panel
End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thd (Tapered)
End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thd (Straight)
Couplings
5-7
5-8
RP2200
RP2210
Coupling, Conduit-to-Conduit
Coupling, Conduit-to-Pipe
Adapters
(Connectors)
5-9
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-13
5-14
RP2311
RP2321
RP2330
RP2340
RP2350
RP2360
Adapter for MIL-C-5015 Connector
Adapter for Triaxial Connector
Adapter for Coaxial Connector
Adapter for MIL-C-26482 Connector
Adapter for MS3155 Type Connectors
Adapter for MIL-C-28840(EC) Backshell
Adapters
(Misc)
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-20
RP2400
RP2411
RP2420
RP2430
RP2431
RP2440
Adapter for MIL-S-24235/1 Stuffing Tube
Adapter for Misc Threaded Fittings
Adapter for MIL-C-24231 Hull Fitting
Adapter for Pipe Thread (Tapered)
Adapter for Pipe Thread (Straight)
Adapter, Nonmetallic
Adapter (End)
5-21
RP2500
Adapter for Panel Termination
Adapters
(Angle)
5-22
5-23
RP2610
RP2620
Adapter, 90°
Adapter, 45°
5.4.2
Basic Construction
The illustrations in the data sheets, figures 5-1 through 5-23, show the basic construction and
the essential characteristics of the RP2000-Series fittings. The illustrations are those of typical fittings
and are intended to show function only. Other constructional details are left to the option of the
manufacturer except as noted elsewhere in this specification. Welded fabrication of the fittings is
allowed. Dimensions and thread sizes shown are those which must exist after plating is completed.
5-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
5.4.3
Conduit-Gripping Mechanism
The illustrations of end fittings and couplings, figures 5-1 through 5-8, show a slotted ferrule
as the conduit-gripping mechanism, but any other simple method that meets the performance
requirements is acceptable.
5.4.4
Overlap Length
The overlap length "L" in the illustrations of end fittings and couplings indicates the minimum
length of conduit required by the conduit-gripping mechanism to function properly.
5.4.5
Minimum ID
The minimum inside diameter of end-fittings and of conduit couplings shall not be less than
the minimum inside diameter of the associated conduit.
5.4.6
Knurl Length
The total length of a knurl may consist of either one wide band (as illustrated in the figures) or
two or more narrow bands of knurls located close to each other.
5.4.7
Standard Thread Sizes
Table 5-2 lists a series of standard thread sizes which have been selected for mating between
end-fittings and adapters. A single thread size is associated with each size of end-fitting, and each
size of end-fitting is associated with only one size of conduit. Thus, any size conduit can be
terminated at a variety of connectors, hull fittings, etc., by means of its associated end-fitting and the
proper adapter. The thread classes shall be Class 2A and 2B for the male and female threads,
respectively. They shall be constructed according to the standards set forth in Handbook H28 (Part
1).
Table 5-2. Standard Thread Sizes for End-Fittings and Adapters
STANDARD SIZE CONDUIT
Conduit
Part
Number
Conduit Size
(Nominal ID)
(inches)
Conduit OD
(Over Braid)
EM02
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
EM20
EM24
1/4
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
2-1/2
3
0.42 ± 0.01
0.54 ± 0.01
0.69 ± 0.01
0.82 ± 0.01
0.94 ± 0.01
1.25 ± 0.01
1.50 ± 0.01
1.75 ± 0.01
2.28 ± 0.015
2.78 ± 0.015
3.28 ± 0.015
5-4
END-FITTING
ADAPTER
B
Thread
(Class 2B)
C
Thread
(Class 2A)
0.4375
0.5625
0.6875
0.8125
0.9375
1.250
1.5625
1.875
2.375
2.875
3.375
-28
-24
-24
-20
-20
-18
-18
-16
-16
-16
-16
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UN
UN
UN
UN
0.4375
0.5625
0.6875
0.8125
0.9375
1.250
1.5625
1.875
2.375
2.875
3.375
-28
-24
-24
-20
-20
-18
-18
-16
-16
-16
-16
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UNEF
UN
UN
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
5.5
5.5.1
MATERIALS
Material for Most Fittings
Unless otherwise noted, the RP2000-Series fittings shall be made of mild steel, AISI type
B113, or any AISI-type low-carbon, hot, or cold-rolled steels, in accordance with FED-STD-66, having
chemical compositions within the following ranges:
Carbon
Manganese
Phosphorus
Sulphur
Lead
5.5.2
(C)
(Mn)
(P)
(S)
(Pb)
0.08% to
0.25% to
0.04% to
0.05% to
0.15% to
0.25% max
1.15% max
0.12% max
0.35% max
0.35% max
Optional Material for RP2330
The RP2330 adapter may be fabricated from polyamide (nylon) in accordance with L-P-410 or
ANSI/ASTM-D4066 whenever installations require that the RP2330 insulate the connector from
conduit.
5.5.3
Optional Material for RP2350
The RP2350 adapter may be fabricated from aluminum alloy in accordance with QQ-A-225 or
ASTM-STD-B85 provided that minimum spacing requirements for aluminum backshells as delineated
in paragraph 7.7 are met.
5.5.4
Material for RP2440
The RP2440 adapter shall be fabricated from polyamide (nylon) rods or tubes in accordance
with L-P-410 or molded from nylon molding plastic in accordance with ANSI/ASTM-D4066. An
optional material is the "super tough" nylon identified by the Dupont trade name "Zytel" ST801 (or
equivalent). Super tough nylon comes in stock shapes for machining, or it can be molded.
5.6
5.6.1
FINISH
Finish for Steel Fittings
The finish on the steel fittings shall be electroless nickel in accordance with SAE AMS 2404C
Electroless Nickel Plating.
5.6.2
Finish for Aluminum Fitting
The finish on the aluminum fitting shall be electroless nickel in accordance with SAE AMS
2404C Electroless Nickel Plating.
5.7
WORKMANSHIP
Fittings shall be fabricated so that they are uniform in quality and free from defects that could
make the fitting unsatisfactory for the intended purpose.
5-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
5.7.1
Welding or Brazing
Fittings fabricated by welding or brazing shall have joints free from defects such as cracks,
undercuts, and gaps. There shall be no burn-through. Fillets shall be uniform and smooth.
5.7.2
Cable Protection
The fittings shall have smooth inner surfaces free from sharp edges that could abrade the
insulation or braid of a cable. Use chamfers or radii where applicable. Break all sharp edges and
corners.
5.8
MARKING
Each RP2000-Series fitting shall be marked in accordance with MIL-STD-130 with the name
of the manufacturer and with its complete part number as specified in this section. Additional
markings may be included at the option of the manufacturer.
5.9
5.9.1
PERFORMANCE
Welding Restriction
Installation of any RP2000-Series fitting shall not require welding, brazing, or similar
operations.
5.9.2
Tensile and Compressive Load Tests
All end-fittings and couplings shall withstand, without slippage, a tensile load of 50 pounds
applied between fitting and conduit for 1 minute. Also, such fittings shall withstand, without slippage, a
compressive load of 50 pounds applied between fitting and conduit for 1 minute.
5.10
5.10.1
QUALIFICATION
Qualification
Manufacturers' designs for end-fittings and couplings must be approved by the Navy.
Qualification tests are not required for adapters, but they must be manufactured in accordance with
this specification. Manufacturers who are interested in having their designs approved should follow
the procedure listed below. Samples sent for testing should be addressed to the Naval Undersea
Warfare Center, Code 3431, Newport, RI 02841-1708. Approval of the RP2100 and RP2200 fittings
will be based on conformity of the fitting to the characteristics outlined in this specification and on any
other factors which may affect intended performance. The Navy reserves the right to require that
sample fittings be made available for testing in all sizes the manufacturer wishes to have approved.
No indebtedness between the U.S. Government and any manufacturer will be incurred in connection
with these qualification tests. Test samples and drawings shall be shipped prepaid by the
manufacturer and will not be returned.
5-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
5.10.2
Application for Qualification
Manufacturers shall submit to NUWC, EMC Branch, Code 3431, Newport, RI, a sample 3/4inch size RP2100 end-fitting installed on a 1-foot length of conduit (identified by manufacturer's name
and part number). In addition, drawings showing construction details of all sizes of the RP2100 endfitting shall be submitted. The drawings shall be numbered and dated for reference purposes.
5.10.3
Deviations
Deviations from this specification such as change in thread size, material or mechanical
design will be considered if the performance requirements can be met. Most changes will require a
new part number for proper identification. Requests for approval of a modification, and assignment of
a new part number shall be addressed to NUWC, EMC Branch, Code 3431, Newport, RI, telephone
(800)-669-6892 X35540. New part numbers and data will be made available upon request, and will be
included in the next change to this handbook.
5.10.4
Sources
The RP2100- and RP2200-Series fittings must be obtained only from the qualified sources
listed in the Qualified Products List, appendix C. Since the RP2300- through RP2600-Series adapters
are simple threaded fittings, they may be obtained from any source which manufactures them in
accordance with this specification.
5.11
5.11.1
PREPARATION FOR DELIVERY
Identification Label
A printed label or tag, in addition to marking required by paragraph 5.8, shall be furnished with
each fitting. The label shall provide the part number, the manufacturer's name, and any other
information, such as a sketch or instruction, which the manufacturer deems pertinent for proper
installation.
5.11.2
Packaging
Each fitting supplied under this specification shall be individually packaged together with an
identification label (see paragraph 5.11.1) in a transparent plastic bag. The bag shall have an
interlocking seal ("ZIP-LOC" type) or shall be closed by heat sealing. Part number identification on the
label shall be easily visible through the sealed bag.
5.12
DATA SHEETS FOR FITTINGS AND ADAPTERS
The following data sheets, figures 5-1 through 5-23, form a part of this specification. They
include assembly drawings, tables of appropriate data, and part number information.
Information regarding installation methods for these fittings may be obtained from NAVSHIPS
drawing 80064-302-4788653, "Installation Methods for High-Permeability Flexible Conduit Hardware,"
(revision A is the latest revision as of the date of this handbook). Note that this drawing is referenced
for information only and, where discrepancies exist, this handbook takes precedence. Note, for
example, that the "Typical Grounding Method" shown as "Method 10-E" in sheet 010 is superseded by
the method shown in MIL-STD-1310D.
5-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2100 Conduit End Fitting, Straight
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2100 END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT AND
PROVIDE A STANDARD THREAD FOR ATTACHING ALL RP2000 SERIES ADAPTERS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-1. RP2100 Conduit End Fitting, Straight
5-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2100 Conduit End Fitting, 90°
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2110 90° END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
AND PROVIDE A STANDARD THREAD FOR ATTACHING ALL RP2000 SERIES ADAPTERS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-2. RP2110 Conduit End Fitting, 90°
5-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2120 Conduit End Fitting, 45°
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2120 45° END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
AND PROVIDE A STANDARD THREAD FOR ATTACHING ALL RP2000 SERIES ADAPTERS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-3. RP2120 Conduit End Fitting, 45°
5-10
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2130 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Panel
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2130 END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
DIRECTLY TO A PANEL. TWO NUTS ARE TO BE SUPPLIED WITH THIS FITTING. ONE NUT SECURS
THE FITTING TO THE PANEL, AND A SECOND NUT ACTS AS A LOCK NUT TO THE FIRST.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-4. RP2130 Conduit End Fitting, Conduit-to-Panel
5-11
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2140 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thread (Tapered)
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2140 END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT WITH
A REUSABLE FITTING HAVING AN EXTERNAL TAPERED PIPE THREAD.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-5.
5-12
RP2140 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe
Thread (Tapered)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2141 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe Thread (Straight)
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2141 END FITTING IS TO TERMINATE FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT WITH
A REUSABLE FITTING HAVING AN EXTERNAL STRAIGHT PIPE THREAD.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-6.
RP2141 End Fitting, Conduit-to-Pipe
Thread (Straight)
5-13
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2200 Coupling, Conduit-to-Conduit
NOTES
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2200 CONDUIT-TO-CONDUIT COUPLING, STYLE 01, IS TO CONNECT TWO
IDENTICAL SIZES OF FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT; SYTLE 02 CONNECTS TWO DIFFERENT SIZES
OF CONDUIT.
2. FOR STYLE 02 TO PROVIDE A TELESCOPING FEATURE, THE INSIDE DIAMETER OF THE LARGE
CONDUIT MUST BE LARGER THAN THE OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF THE SMALL CONDUIT.
3. EXAMPLE OF STYLE 02 USE: AN INLINE CONNECTOR (OR SIMILAR COMPONENT) INSTALLED IN A
CABLE CAN BE SHIELDED WITH THE AID OF THESE COUPLINGS. THE CONNECTOR IS ENCLOSED IN
A SHORT LENGTH OF LARGE CONDUIT WHICH IS THEN COUPLED AT EACH END TO THE SMALL
CONDUIT WHICH ENCLOSES THE CABLE.
4. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
5. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-7. RP2200 Coupling, Conduit-to-Conduit
5-14
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2210 Coupling, Conduit-to-Pipe
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2210 COUPLING IS TO ATTACH FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT TO RIGID
SHIELDING CONDUIT (“BLACK IRON” PIPE).
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-8. RP2210 Coupling, Conduit-to-Pipe
5-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2311 Adapter for MIL-C-5015 Connector
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2210 COUPLING IS TO ATTACH FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT TO RIGID
SHIELDING CONDUIT (“BLACK IRON” PIPE).
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-9.
5-16
RP2311 Adapter for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 1 of 2)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2311 (Continued)
TABLE II
CONN
CODE
A
B
C
D
E
F
TABLE III
A
THREAD
CODE
01
02
03
04
04
05
05
06
06
07
08
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
MIL-C-5015 CONNECTOR CODE
MFR
CLASS
SERIES
ALL MFR
AMPHENOL
AMPHENOL
BENDIX
CANNON
CANNON
A
E&R
A,E,&R
A
E&R
MS-SERIES BACKSHELL
MS3100, MS3101, MS3106, 97-3100, 97-3101, 97-3106
MS3100, MS3101, MS3106, 69-3100, 69-3101, 69-3106
MS3100, MS3101, MS3106, 10-214, 10-720, 10-721, 10-726
MS3100, MS3101, MS3106, CA3101, CA3106
MS3100, MS3101, MS3106
A-THREAD CODE AND ADAPTER DIMENSIONS
CONN
SHELL
SIZE
8S
8S
8
8S
10S
10S
10SL
10SL
12,12S
12,12S
12SL
14,14S
16,16S
18
20
20
20,22
22
24
24,28
28
32
32
32
36
36
36
36
36
40
40
40
44
48
48
CONNECTOR
CODE
(See Table 2311-2)
D
B
C,E,F
A
A,B,C,D,F
E
E,F
A,B,C,D
A,D,F
B,C,E
A
A,B,C,D,E,F
A,B,C,D,E,F
A,B,C,D,E,F
B,D,E,F
C
A
B,C,D,E,F
B,C,D,E,F
A
B,C,D,E,F
A
D,E,F
B,C
A
D
C
E,F
B
A
D
B,E,F
B,F
F
B
A
THREAD
(Class 2B)
.375-32 UNEF
.4375-27 UNS
.4375-28 UNEF
.500-28 UNEF
.500-28 UNEF
.5625-24 UNEF
.5625-24 UNEF
.625-24 UNEF
.625-24 UNEF
.6875-24 UNEF
.750-20 UNEF
.750-20 UNEF
.875-20 UNEF
1.000-20 UNEF
1.125-18 UNEF
1.125-24 UNS
1.1875-18 UNEF
1.250-18 UNEF
1.375-18 UNEF
1.4375-18 UNEF
1.625-18 UNEF
1.750-18 UNS
1.875-16 UN
1.9063-18
2.000-18 UNS
2.0625-16 UNS
2.0625-20
2.125-16 UN
2.125-18
2.250-16 UN
2.3125-16 UNS
2.375-16 UN
2.625-16 UN
2.8125-18
2.875-16 UN
H
±.02
.18
.21
.21
.21
.21
.25
.25
.25
.25
.25
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.28
.31
.28
.31
.28
.31
.31
.31
.31
.28
.31
D
DIA
±.02
.50
.56
.56
.62
.62
.68
.68
.75
.75
.81
.87
.87
1.00
1.12
1.25
1.25
1.31
1.37
1.50
1.56
1.75
1.87
2.00
2.03
2.12
2.18
2.18
2.25
2.25
2.37
2.43
2.50
2.75
2.93
3.00
E
DIA
±.02
.28
.34
.34
.37
.37
.45
.45
.50
.50
.57
.62
.62
.75
.87
1.00
1.00
1.06
1.12
1.25
1.31
1.50
1.62
1.75
1.78
1.87
1.93
1.93
2.00
2.00
2.12
2.18
2.25
2.50
2.68
2.75
J
(Style 01)*
±.03
.50
.53
.53
.56
.56
.59
.59
.62
.62
.65
.68
.68
.71
.75
.78
.78
.81
.87
1.00
1.06
1.12
1.18
1.25
1.28
1.34
1.37
1.37
1.40
1.40
1.50
1.56
1.62
1.87
2.06
2.12
* FOR STYLE 2, J DIMENSION IS ZERO.
Figure 5-9.
RP2311 Adapter for MIL-C-5015
Connector (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2321 Adapter for Triaxial Connector
NOTES:
1. THE FUNCTION OF THE RP2321 COUPLES TRIAXIAL CONNECTORS TO RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120
END FITTINGS.
2. RP2321 SUPERSEDES RP2320; THEREFORE, AND REQUIREMENT FOR AN RP2320 WILL BE
SATISFIED WITH AN RP2321.
3. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
4. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-10. RP2321 Adapter for Triaxial Connector
5-18
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2330 Adapter for Coaxial Connector
NOTES:
1. THE RP2330 ADAPTER COUPLES COAXIAL CONNECTORS TO RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END
FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. SELECT AN A-THREAD FROM TABLE II WHICH MATCHES THAT OF THE BACK NUT ON THE
CONNECTOR BEING USED. IF NONE OF THE A-THREADS MATCH, SUBSTITUTE THE DESIRED ATHREAD INFORMATION IN LIEU OF THE A-THREAD CODE IN THE PART NUMBER. FOR EXAMPLE, AN
ADAPTER WITH A
28 THREAD OF 5/16” H-LENGTH FOR A 3/8” CONDUIT WOULD HAV E THE PART
NUMBER RP2330-1/2-28-5/16-03.
4. IF A PARTICULAR INSTALLATION REQUIRES THAT THE CONNECTOR BODY BE “FLOATED” OFF
GROUND, THAT IS, INSULATED FROM THE CONDUIT, USE THE MATERIAL CODE LETTER “N” IN THE
PART NUMBER. THIS LETTER INDICATES THE NON-CONDUCTING MATERIAL, NYLON.
5. THE RP2440 NYLON ADAPTER PROVIDES AN OPTIONAL METHOD OF INSULATING CONNECTOR
BODY FROM CONDUIT.
6. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-11. RP2330 Adapter for Coaxial Connector (Sheet 1 of 3)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
5-19
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2330 (Continued)
NOTES (Continued):
7. THIS RP2330 ADAPTER IS DESIGNED TO REPLACE THE GLAND NUT (A SIMPLE ONE-PIECE
THREADED COMPONENT) AT THE REAR OF A MIL-C-39012 CONNECTOR, IN ORDER TO PROVIDE A
MEANS FOR TERMINATING FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT. HOWEVER, THE MIL-C-39012
SPECIFICATION DOES NOT PROVIDE CONFIGURATION CONTROL OVER MOST OF THE INTERNAL
COMPONENTS. AS A RESULT, (1) THE THREAD SIZES FOR THE REAR END OF COAXIAL
CONNECTORS MAY VARY AMONG MANUFACTURERS, AND (2) SEVERAL DIFFERENT INTERNAL
DESIGNS HAVE BEEN PRODUCED, SOME OF WHICH ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE EXISTING
RP2330 ADAPTER.
BECAUSE THERE IS NOT CONFIGURATION CONTROL, THE GOVERNMENT DESIGNATION (SUCH AS
PART NUMBER M39012/01-0015) FOR AN M39012 CONNECTOR GIVES NO INDICATION AS TO WHICH
INTERNAL DESIGN IS CONTAINED IN THE CONNECTOR, FOR EXAMBLE, THE M39012/01-0015,
SUPPLIED BY AUTOMATIC CONNECTOR, INC., MAY HAVE THE COMPATIBLE ONE-PIECE GLAND-NUT
DESIGN OR IT MAY HAVE A NEWER DEISGN (CALLED WEDGE-LOCK) WHICH INCLUDES A GLAND
NUT WITH A CAPTIVE FREE-SPINNING FERRULE THAT PRESSES THE FANNED-OUT CABLE-BRAID
AGAINST A CONICAL BODY WITHOUT ROTATING, AS THE GLAND NUT IS TIGHTENED. THIS NEWER
DESIGN IS NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE EXISTING ONE-PIECE RP2330 ADAPTER BECAUSE THE
ADAPTER TENDS TO CUT THE CABLE-BRAID IN A SAWING ACTION AS IT IS TIGHTENED.
AS AN INTERIM SOLUTION TO MAKING THE RP2330 ADAPTER COMPATIBLE WITH THE WEDGE-LOCK
DESIGN (FOR EXAMPLE) AND ADAPTER-FERRULE, TO BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE RP2330
ADAPTER, MUST BE PROVIDED. THIS ADAPTER-FERRUL SHOULD DUPLICATE THE BASIC SHAPE OF
THE FREE-SPINNING FERRULE CONTAINED IN THE CONNECTOR.
TABLE III LISTS THREE SIZES OF ADAPTER FERRULE (FOR THE “WEDGE-LOCK” DESIGN ONLY) TO
BE USED WITH THE RP2330 ADAPTER. NOTE THAT THE INSIDE DIMENSIONS OF THE FERRULE
RESTRICT THE SIZE OF COAXIAL CABLE DIAMETER WHICH CAN BE USED. NOTE THAT THIS
FERRULE DOES NOT PROVIDE FOR RETENTION OF THE ORIGINAL WATERTIGHT INTEGRITY OF THE
COMPLETE CONNECTOR.
ANOTHER METHOD OF OBTAINING AN ADAPTER FERRULE IS TO USE THE ACTUAL FERRULE
PORTION OF THE CONNECTOR BY CUTTIN G IT FROM THE GLAND NUT.
COMMENT: A BETTER METHOD OF TERMINATING FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT TO A COAXIAL
CONNECTOR MAY BE AN ADAPTER DESIGNED TO ATTACH TO THE OUTSIDE OF THE CONNECTOR
RATHER THAN DISTURBING THE INTERNAL COMPONENTS OF THE CONNECTOR ITSELF. THE REAR
END OF THE ADAPTER WOULD PROVIDE THREADS FOR ATTACHING A CONDUIT END-FITTING.
Figure 5-11. RP2330 Adapter for Coaxial Connector (Sheet 2 of 3)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
5-20
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2330 (Continued)
Figure 5-11. RP2330 Adapter for Coaxial Connector (Sheet 3 of 3)
5-21
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2340 Adapter for MIL-C-26482 Connector
Figure 5-12.
5-22
RP2340 Adapter for MIL-C-26482
Connector (Sheet 1 of 2)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2340 (Continued)
NOTES:
1. THE RP2340 ADAPTER COUPLES MIL-C-26482 CONNECTORS (MS3110, MS3111, OR MS3116 SERIES)
TO RP2100, RP 2110, OR RP2120 END FITTINGS.
2. FOR MIL-C-26482, SERIES 2 THE RP2350 ADAPTER MAY BE USED.
3. THE THREAD LENGTH, H, IS CRITICAL. IF A DIE IS USED TO CUT THE THREAD, THE H DIMENSION IS
AS SHOWN. IF A LATHE IS USED TO CUT THE THREAD, REDUCE H DIMENSION BY 0.06 INCHES.
4. DIMENSION NOT AVAILABLE
5. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
6. SEE PARAGRAPH 7.7 FOR CONDITIONS FOR USE OF ALUMINUM CONNECTOR BACKSHELLS.
7. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-12.
RP2340 Adapter for MIL-C-26482
Connector (Sheet 2 of 2)
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
5-23
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2350 Adapter for MS3155-Type Connectors
Figure 5-13.
Reprinted without change
5-24
RP2350 Adapter for MS3155-Type
Connectors (Sheet 1 of 2)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2350 (Continued)
NOTES:
1. THE RP2350 ADAPTER COUPLES CONNECTORS LISTED IN TABLE 1 TO RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120
CONDUIT END FITTINGS.
2. THE COUPLING NUT END OF THIS ADAPTER SHALL CONFORM TO MILITARY STANDARD MS3155
(NAVY), “CONNECTOR, ELECTRIC, REAR ACCESSORY DESIGN STANDARD”. MS3155 TAKES
PRECEDENCE OVER THIS SPECIFICATION.
3. THE E DIAMETER AND M-THREAD OF THIS SPECIFICATION ARE THE SAME AS THE E DIAMETER AND
M-THREAD OF MS3155, AND ARE INCLUDED FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES.
4. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
5. ALUMINUM ALLOY MAY BE SPECIFIED PROVIDED THAT MINIMUM SPACING REQUIREMENTS FOR
THE ADAPTER (BACKSHELL), DELINEATED IN PARAGRAPH 7.7 ARE MET.
6. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-13.
RP2350 Adapter for MS3155-Type
Connectors (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-25
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2360 Adapter for MIL-C-28840(EC) Backshell
Figure 5-14.
5-26
RP2360 Adapter for MIL-C-28840(EC)
Backshell (Sheet 1 of 2)
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2360 (Continued)
A THREAD
CODE
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
SHELL SIZE
(Ref.)
B,C
B,C
C
D,E
C,D,F
D,E,F,G
F,G,H
G,H,J
J
C,D,E
C,D,E,F,G
D,E,F,G
F,G,H
G,H,J
J
A THREAD
(Class 2B)
.625-24 UNEF
.750-20 UNEF
.875-20 UNEF
1.000-20 UNEF
1.118-18 UNEF
1.438-18 UNEF
1.750-18 UNS
2.000-18 UNS
2.250-16 UNS
1.125-18 UNEF
1.250-18 UNEF
1.625-18 UNEF
1.875-18 UNS
2.125-16 UN
2.750-16 UN
D DIA
±.015
.875
1.000
1.125
1.250
1.438
1.688
2.000
2.250
2.500
1.375
1.500
1.875
2.125
2.375
3.000
E DIA
±.015
.453
.578
.703
.828
1.000
1.250
1.562
1.813
2.062
.938
1.078
1.438
1.688
1.938
2.563
NOTES:
1. THE RP2360 ADAPTER PROVIDES A NON-ENVIRONMENTAL COUPLING BETWEEN THE MIL-C28840(EC) BACKSHELLS AND THE RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END FITTINGS.
SPECIFICALLY, THE A-THREAD OF THIS ADAPTER (A-THREAD CODES 01 THRU 09) MATES WITH THE
V-THREAD OF THE M28840/6 BACKSHELL (STRAIGHT), THE M23340/8 BACKSHELL (90 ), OR THE
M28840/9 BACKSHELL (45 ).
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
THE A-THREAD CODES 10 THRU 15 MATE WITH THE C-THREADS OF M28840/5, M28840/25 OR
M28840/27. (THE A-THREAD CODES 03 AND 04 MATE WITH THESE C-THREADS ALSO).
THIS ADAPTER WILL ALSO MATE WITH THE PLUG ASSEMBLIES M28840/26, M28840/28 OR M28840/29
SINCE THE BACKSHELLS USED IN THESE PLUG ASSEMBLIES ARE THE M28840/6, M28840/8 AND
M28840/9 TYPES RESPECTIVELY.
THE COLUMN LABELED “SHELL SIZE (Ref)” IS PRESENTED FOR REFERENCE PURPOSES ONLY. IT
DOES NOT DIRECTLY EFFECT THE SELECTION OF AN ADAPTER SIZE TO MATE WITH A PARTICULAR
BACKSHELL SIZE. ONLY THE C-THREAD OR THE V-THREAD SIZE OF A BACKSHELL DETERMINES
WHICH A-THREAD SIZE OF ADAPTER TO USE.
DIMENSION NOT AVAILABLE
SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
SEE PARAGRAPH 7.7 FOR CONDITIONS FOR USE OF ALUMINUM CONNECTOR BACKSHELLS.
DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-14.
RP2360 Adapter for MIL-C-28840(EC)
Backshell (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-27
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2400 Adapter for MIL-S-24235/1 Stuffing Tube
NOTES:
1. THE RP2400 ADAPTER COUPLES MIL-S-24235/1 STUFFING TUBES TO RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120
END FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. THE MAXIMUM “P” DIMENSION OF TABLE II SHOULD BE LARGER THAN THE “C” THREAD OUTSIDE
DIMENSION WHEN THE REQUIRED “C” AND “A” THREAD COMBINATION WOULD RESULT IN “C” O D
LARGER THAN THE “P” DIMENSION GIVEN FOR THE REQUIRED “A” THREAD O D.
4. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-15. RP2400 Adapter for MIL-S-24235/1 Stuffing Tube
5-28
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2411 Adapter for Miscellaneous Threaded Fittings
NOTES:
1. THE RP2411 ADAPTER COUPLES MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS TO RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END
FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. THE AMERICAN NATIONAL THREAD SERIES (N) HAS BEEN SUPERSEDED BY THE UNIFIED THREAD
SERIES (UN). THE SERIES N-THREAD SIZES LISTED IN TABLE II ARE RETAINED FOR USE WITH
THOSE ITEMS WHICH HAVE SERIES N-THREADS.
4. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-16.
RP2411 Adapter for Miscellaneous
Threaded Fittings
5-29
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2420 Adapter for MIL-C-24231 Hull Fitting
NOTES:
1. THE RP2420 ADAPTER COUPLES MIL-S-24231 PRESSUREPROOF CONNECTORS (HULL FITTINGS) TO
RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-17.
5-30
RP2420 Adapter for MIL-C-24231
Hull Fitting
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2430 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Tapered)
NOTES:
1. THE RP2430 ADAPTER COUPLES ANY FITTING HAVING A FEMALE TAPERED PIPE THREAD TO
RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-18. RP2430 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Tapered)
5-31
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2431 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Straight)
NOTES:
1. THE RP2431 ADAPTER COUPLES ANY FITTING HAVING A FEMALE STRAIGHT PIPE THREAD TO
RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120 END FITTINGS.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-19. RP2431 Adapter for Pipe Thread (Straight)
5-32
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2440 Adapter, Non-Metallic
Notes:
1. THE RP2440 ADAPTER COUPLES AN RP2000-SERIES METALLIC END-FITTING TO AN RP2000-SERIES
METALLIC ADAPTER, AND PROVIDES ELECTRICAL ISOLATION BETWEEN THEM.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-20. RP2440 Adapter, Nonmetallic
5-33
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2500 Adapter for Panel Termination
NOTES:
1. THE RP2500 ADAPTER PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY OF TERMINATING AN RP2100, RP2110, OR RP2120
ENDFITTING TO A PANEL.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-21. RP2500 Adapter for Panel Termination
5-34
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2610 Adapter, 90°
NOTES:
1. THE RP2610 ADAPTER CONVERTS A STRAIGHT RP2100 END FITTING INTO A 90° END FITTING. SEE
RP2110.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-22. RP2610 Adapter, 90°
5-35
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
RP2620 Adapter, 45°
NOTES:
1. THE RP2620 ADAPTER CONVERTS A STRAIGHT RP2100 END FITTING INTO A 45° END FITTING. SEE
RP2120.
2. SEE TEXT FOR MATERIAL, FINISH, MARKING, ETC.
3. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 5-23. RP2620 Adapter, 45°
5-36
SECTION 6
CABLE AND SPACING REQUIREMENTS
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 6
CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
6.1
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.3
6.4
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.5
6.5.1
6.5.2
6.5.3
6.5.4
6.5.5
6.6
6.6.1
6.6.2
6.6.3
6.6.4
6.6.5
6.6.6
6.6.7
6.6.8
6.6.9
6.7
6.7.1
6.7.2
6.7.3
6.7.4
6.7.5
6.7.5.1
6.8
6.8.1
Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS .........................................................................................
LIST OF TABLES........................................................................................................
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................
Cable Types............................................................................................................
Special Case Situations..........................................................................................
DEFINITIONS .............................................................................................................
CABLE CATEGORIZATION .......................................................................................
Table of Cable Categories and Designators...........................................................
Selection of Cable Designators ..............................................................................
PARAMETERS AND CONSIDERATIONS FOR CABLE SPACING
REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................
Effective Loop-Area Parameter ..............................................................................
Self-Compatibility of Cable .....................................................................................
Self-Compatibility of Equipment .............................................................................
Differential-Mode Versus Common-Mode Interference
Considerations........................................................................................................
Structure Currents and Armored Power Cable
Considerations........................................................................................................
CABLE-TO-CABLE SPACING REQUIREMENTS......................................................
Cable-to-Cable Spacing Chart................................................................................
Spacing of Multiconductor Cables ..........................................................................
Spacing of Dual-Function Cables ...........................................................................
Spacing of Cables in Muted Systems.....................................................................
Spacing of Single Conductor Cables......................................................................
Spacing of Susceptible Cables with Large
Effective Loop Areas ..............................................................................................
Spacing of Portable Equipment Cables..................................................................
Spacing of Microwave Transmission Lines
and Waveguides.....................................................................................................
Installation Practice Regarding Excess Cabling .....................................................
CABLE SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS......................................................................
Partial Shielding......................................................................................................
Magnetic Saturation of Shielding Conduit...............................................................
Flexible Metal Conduit ............................................................................................
Rigid Metal Conduit ................................................................................................
Conduit Grounding/Insulation Requirements..........................................................
Single-Point Grounding...........................................................................................
PROCEDURES FOR CALCULATING CABLE-TO-CABLE
SPACING AND SHIELDING.......................................................................................
Procedure 1 - Determining Cable-to-Cable Spacing and
Shielding for Radiators Versus Susceptors in Susceptor
Categories S1, S2, and S4 .....................................................................................
6-ii
6-ii
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-3
6-6
6-6
6-6
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-8
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-10
6-10
6-11
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-i
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Paragraph
6.8.1.1
6.8.2
6.8.2.1
6.9
6.9.1
6.9.2
6.10
6.10.1
6.10.2
6.10.3
6.11
Page
Examples for Procedure 1......................................................................................
Procedure 2 - Determining Cable-to-Cable Spacing and
Shielding for Radiators Versus Susceptors in Susceptor
Categories S3 and R4 Through R8 ........................................................................
Example for Procedure 2........................................................................................
SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS FOR SUSCEPTIBLE CABLES
TO OTHER INTERFERENCE SOURCES .................................................................
Susceptor Categories S1 Through S4....................................................................
Susceptor Categories R4 Through R8 ...................................................................
GUIDELINES FOR EMC CABLEWAY DESIGN.........................................................
Guidelines for Susceptor Cableway Design ...........................................................
Guidelines for Radiator Cableway Design ..............................................................
Guidelines for Radiator/Susceptor and Less-Sensitive
Susceptor Cable Cableway Design ........................................................................
CABLE MARKING ......................................................................................................
6-15
6-18
6-19
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-21
6-21
6-22
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
6-1
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-5
6-6
6-7
6-8
6-9
6-10
Page
Cables in Categories R1 and R2 ................................................................................
Cables in Categories R3 Through R8 .........................................................................
Cables in Category R9 ................................................................................................
Cables in Categories S1 Through S4 .........................................................................
Categories S1, S2, and S4, Group Numbers and Associated
Group Voltages ...........................................................................................................
Spacing Chart for Radiator and Susceptor Cables .....................................................
Shielding Effectiveness of Conduit Versus Frequency ...............................................
Spacing and Shielding Chart for Susceptible Cables
(Categories S1 Through S4) to Interference Sources ................................................
Measurement of Cable Spacing Distances.................................................................
Partial Shielding Installation ........................................................................................
6-25
6-28
6-30
6-33
6-35
6-36
6-37
6-38
6-39
6-39
LIST OF TABLES
Table
6-1
Page
Cable Categories and Designators .............................................................................
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-ii
6-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 6
CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
6.1
INTRODUCTION
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) between electrical/electronic equipment and systems is
achieved in part by close adherence to proven installation methods and procedures. This section
provides such a procedure. It can be employed to establish the necessary cable grouping, routing,
spacing, and shielding requirements to ensure EMC in naval installations. The procedure is based on
the following parameters.
6.2
a.
Radiation characteristics of cables and other interference sources.
b.
Susceptibility characteristics of cables in terms of "effective loop area."
c.
Sensitivity and operating frequency of equipment connected to the susceptible cables.
d.
Shielding effectiveness of shielding conduit.
SCOPE
This section describes the requirements for cable spacing between susceptible cables and
cables that radiate electromagnetic energy, and between susceptible cables and other interference
sources. The use of shielding conduit is specified only when the spacing requirements cannot be met.
Cable spacing and shielding requirements contained in this section are valid for any shipboard use
where the cable types designated herein are employed. Although the scope of this document is
limited to below-decks shipboard environments, these cable-to-cable spacing requirements apply to
both inboard and outboard installations including the sea water medium.
6.2.1
Cable Types
The nomenclature for cable types employed in this section is in accordance with the following
military specifications: MIL-C-915 (General Shipboard Cable), MIL-C-17 (Coaxial, Twin, and Triaxial
Cables), MIL-C-24640 (Lightweight Cable), and MIL-C-24643 (Low-Smoke version of MIL-C-915).
Cable applications not listed in these four specifications, such as a signal cable used for low-level
power transmission, shall be handled on a "special case" basis. Also, when unlisted cables must be
employed, a "special case" analysis is required. (See paragraph 6.2.2.)
6.2.2
Special Case Situations
Any EMI problem or situation whose resolution is beyond the scope of instruction provided in
this handbook is considered a "special case." Any recommended solutions to special case problems
(supported by sufficient rationale) should be submitted to: Commander, Naval Sea Systems
Command, Code 05K2B Arlington, VA 22242, telephone (703) 602-2549 or other NAVSEAdesignated authority for approval.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.3
DEFINITIONS
NOTE: Figures 6-1 through 6-10, which are referenced throughout this section, are grouped at the
end of this section.
a.
Susceptor - A cable that is susceptible to magnetic field radiation.
b.
Radiator - A cable that produces magnetic field radiation.
c.
Cable Designator - The cable designation as determined by this section. It consists of a
cable category or a cable category and group number.
d.
Cable Category - Prefixes "R" and "S" are used to designate the various cable
categories in this section. Categories R1, R2, R3, and R9 are considered to be
radiators only. Categories R4 through R8 are considered to be radiators but may also
be susceptors. Categories S1 through S4 are considered to be susceptors only.
e.
Group Number - In the "R" categories, the number following the category after a dash
identifying a family of cables having similar electrical characteristics. In the "S"
categories, the number following the category with a dash representing the group
voltage V2 (dBV) which is determined by the equipment design performance sensitivity
V1 (dBV) (see figure 6-5).
f.
V1 (dBV) - Equipment design performance sensitivity. This sensitivity will normally be
supplied by the equipment manufacturer, or it can be obtained from Government or
contractor furnished information. V1 (dBV) is defined as the lowest input signal voltage
which will produce a zero dB signal-to-noise ratio within the operating bandwidth of the
equipment.
g.
Passband - The frequency band used when determining V1 (dBV), the equipment
design performance sensitivity.
h.
Spacing Restriction - The cable-to-cable spacing available (in inches) due to physical
restrictions, if any, of the installation.
i.
V2 (dBV) - The group voltage in figure 6-5 that is determined by V1 (dBV), the
equipment design performance sensitivity.
j.
S (dB) - Shielding effectiveness provided by shielding conduit and given as a function of
frequency in figure 6-7.
k.
V3 (dBV) = V1 (dBV) + S (dB) - A voltage directly related to the sum of the equipment
design performance sensitivity and the shielding effectiveness of the conduit, in
decibels.
l.
Special Case - Any EMI problem, condition, or other situation whose resolution is
beyond the scope of instruction provided in this handbook is considered a "special
case." Recommended solutions to special case problems, along with the supporting
rationale, should be submitted to NAVSEA (see paragraph 6.2.2) or other NAVSEAdesignated authority for approval.
Reprinted without change
6-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.4
6.4.1
CABLE CATEGORIZATION
Table of Cable Categories and Designators
The cable categories, category descriptions, group numbers, and cable designators are listed
in table 6-1. Note that the cable designator consists of a cable category and, in most cases, a group
number.
6.4.2
Selection of Cable Designators
The selection of cable designators should reflect actual cable characteristics and operating
parameters. The cable category descriptions given in table 6-1 do not completely describe all
possible functions, therefore, a reasonable amount of analysis and judgement is required in selecting
the proper designator. As an example, a cable used in a dc control circuit employed to switch a logic
gate should be categorized as an R-8 (cables used to carry digital data), and not an R9-1 (cables that
carry dc). Using the R-8 category cables, the gate switching function is protected against electric field
interference by an overall cable braid. This would not be the case were it categorized R9-1 and an
unshielded power cable used as the transmission line.
The selection of a cable designator that provides greater than necessary protection is
unwarranted because it places prohibitive spatial restrictions on adjacent cables.
6.5
6.5.1
PARAMETERS AND CONSIDERATIONS FOR CABLE SPACING REQUIREMENTS
Effective Loop-Area Parameter
The susceptibility of a cable to magnetic fields if proportional to its effective loop area (see
paragraph 6.1b) which can be determined from the geometric and electrical properties of the cable.
The equation used to determine effective loop area (A) is presented here for reference.
e
ind
square inches
A =
,
0.40 6fB
where:
eind
f
B
= induced voltage in microvolts
= frequency in hertz
= flux density in gauss.
The data for determining effective loop area is obtained by measuring the voltage induced
e
( ind) in a fixed length of cable placed in the calibrated field (B) of a Helmholtz coil energized at a
frequency (f). The resulting information is used to assign cable categories to the individual cables.
Tabular data that lists cables and their assigned categories and group numbers are provided in figures
6-1 through 6-5.
6.5.2
Self-Compatibility of Cable
It is assumed throughout this section that functions within multiconductor cables will be
compatible. A multiconductor cable should not contain radiator and susceptor functions which must
operate simultaneously if any spacing of those functions is required by Figure 6-6. If no spacing is
required by Figure 6-6, and if the susceptor functions are contained in shield braid for protection from
electric-field coupling, the functions should be compatible.
6-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table 6-1. Cable Categories and Designators
Cable
Category
6-4
Category Description
Group
Numbers
Cable
Designators
R1
Shipboard cables that carry 60-Hz power above
0.5 amp. Cables in this category are listed in
figure 6-1.
0 thru
7, and 9
R1-0 thru
R1-7, R1-9
R2
Shipboard cables that carry 400-Hz power
above 0.5 amp. See figure 6-1.
0 thru
7, and 9
R2-0 thru
R2-7, R1-9
R3
All transmitting systems using the cables listed
in figure 6-2.
1, 2,
3
R3-1, R3-2,
R3-3
R4
Transmitting systems and triggering circuits
operating above 100 kHz and using RG-type
coaxial cables. See figure 6-2.
(none)
R4
R5
Cables used to carry audio signals whose
maximum values exceed 0.1 volt. Typical
components are announcing circuits, ac
recorders, loadspeakers, call bells, and alarm
bells. See figure 6-2.
(none)
R5
R6
Cables that carry 60-Hz synchro signals, 60-Hz
indicator signals, 60-Hz control signals at 0.5
amp or less, or 60-Hz power at 0.5 amp or less.
See figure 6-2.
NOTE: Any 60-Hz control signal over 0.5 amp
must be classified in the R1 category. See
figure 6-1.
1, 2
R6-1, R6-2
R7
Cables that carry 400-Hz synchro signals, 400Hz indicator signals, 400-Hz control signals at
0.5 amp or less, or 400-Hz power at 0.5 amp or
less. See figure 6-2.
NOTE: Any 400-Hz control signal over 0.5 amp
must be classified in the R2 category. See
figure 6-1.
1, 2
R7-1, R7-2
R8
Cables used to carry digital data. See figure 62.
(none)
R8
R9
Cables that carry dc. See figure 6-3.
1, 2,
3
R9-1, R9-2,
R9-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table 6-1. Cable Categories and Designators (Continued)
Cable
Category
S1, S2
Category Description
Receiving systems operating in the frequency
band 10 kHz to 100 kHz and using cables listed
in figure 6-4. See note 1.
Group
Numbers
Cable
Designators
1 thru
8
S1-1 thru
S1-8, S2-1
thru S2-8
The group numbers 1 thru 8 are related to system
sensitivity. See notes 2, 3 and 4.
S3
Receiving and video systems operating above
100 kHz and using the cables listed in figure 6-4.
See note 4.
(none)
S3
S4
Receiving systems operating below 10 kHz and
using cables listed in figure 6-4. The category
also includes low level sensor signals and varying
dc, for example, strain gages, resistive
temperature devices (RTDs) and accelerometers
and microphones.
1 thru
8
S4-1 thru
S4-8
The group numbers 1 thru 8 are related to system
sensitivity. See notes 2, 3 and 4.
NOTES ON "S" CATEGORIES
1.
The difference between cable categories S1 and S2 lies in the type of cable used. For
example, in figure 6-4 the S1 category is assigned to MIL-C-17 RG-type coaxial cables only,
whereas the S2 category is assigned to the MIL-C-915 and MIL-C-24640 cable types listed.
2.
The group number for cable category S1, S2 or S4 is determined by the equipment design
performance sensitivity, V1(dbV). For example: a certain equipment has a V1 of -105 dbV;
this value falls within the range of values of -120 to -100 dbV listed under "Group Voltage
V2(dbV)" in column 3 of figure 6-5. The group number associated with this group voltage is "4"
(see column 2 of figure 6-5).
3.
The sensitivity referred to in categories S1, S2, and S4 means that the voltage induced in the
susceptible cable is equal to the design performance sensitivity of the equipment connected to
the cable.
4.
The design performance sensitivity V1 of the S1, S2, S3 and S4 cable categories is less than
or equal to 0.1 volts. Sensitivity levels above 0.1 volts must be assigned a radiator category.
6-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.5.3
Self-Compatibility of Equipment
It is assumed that equipment supplied to the installing activity by the manufacturer will be selfcompatible. In cases where cable-connector mounting on individual cabinets or equipment violates
the spacing requirements described in this section, the manufacturer's spacing will take precedence.
It must also be assumed that, although spacing between cable penetrations on Government
Furnished Equipment (GFE) cabinets may be less than that prescribed in this section, the system in
question passed all the tests required of GFE and was accepted for service use. Therefore, the cable
spacing was adequate for the conditions under which the equipment was tested. It is possible that
acceptance tests were conducted in a sterile electromagnetic environment such as a screen-room
area supplied with filtered power. It is also possible that the spacing may be inadequate when the
equipment is operated in the more stringent shipboard environment. For this reason, spacing of
external cables connected to such a cabinet or equipment shall be routed to meet the spacing
requirements of this section within as short a distance from the cabinet or equipment as practicable.
6.5.4
Difference-Mode Versus Common-Mode Interference Considerations
Common-mode interference (CMI) voltages are those voltages appearing in equal magnitude
and phase from each signal conductor to ground. They are developed as follows:
a.
Electrostatic coupling - The electrostatic environment is capacitively coupled to both
signal wires.
b.
Electromagnetic induction - The environmental magnetic field threads both signal line
areas.
Electrical noise can be capacitively coupled from adjacent cables and cause CMI in ship
installations which utilize long lengths of unshielded cable. CMI can be eliminated in most cases with
the use of shielded cables (i.e., shielded twisted pairs as opposed to unshielded twisted pairs).
To minimize the effects of CMI, differential signal circuits and properly terminated shielded
cable should be employed in the design of susceptible equipment. As this document assumes the
common-mode case has been properly addressed, the spacing requirements contained herein are
based only on the effects of differential-mode interference.
6.5.5
Structure Currents and Powerline Isolation Transformers
For purposes of this document, structure currents are defined as power-line currents flowing
line-to-line via the ship's hull and structure. The connections from line-to-ground are completed
through line-to-ground filter capacitors installed on powerline inputs to electrical and electronic
equipment.
6-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
The latest issues of MIL-E-16400H(NAVY), MIL-STD-1399(NAVY) Section 300(A), and MILSTD-461(C) specify limits for leakage current and the size of line-to-ground filter capacitors. These
limits and other requirements are stated as follows:
a.
The leakage current (vector sum of all phases) of the equipment, when EMI filtering is
not required, shall not exceed 5 milliamperes (mA).
b.
Where EMI filtering (powerline filters) is required in the user equipment, a line-to-line
configuration is preferred. If a line-to-ground configuration is used for filtering, then the
value of the filter capacitance shall not exceed 0.1 microfarad per phase for 60 Hz
equipment and 0.02 microfarad per phase for 400 Hz equipment. If performance or
operational needs of a user equipment require an electrical ground either solidly or by
means of capacitors which exceed the values stated above, then that equipment shall
be electrically isolated from the power system. Isolation transformers shall be installed
on equipment with EMI filtering whose leakage current is in excess of 30 milliamperes.
When necessary, the isolation transformer shall be part of the equipment configuration.
User equipment considerations are listed below.
a.
Equipment purchased by the shipyards for shipboard installation, non-Government
Furnished Equipment (non-GFE), should employ line-to-line filters or internal isolation
transformers as required by the latest issues of MIL-E-16400(NAVY), MIL-STD-1399
(NAVY) Section 300, and MIL-STD-461.
b.
For equipment provided to the shipbuilder by the Government, Government Furnished
Equipment (GFE), the shipyards must install in accordance with Installation Control
Drawings (ICDs).
c.
If EMI problems are identified during system testing, the installer should become aware
of the problem caused by structure currents and the potential need for low-capacitanceto-ground filters or powerline isolation transformers. As TDA to the NAVSEA SEMCIP
IEMC Element, NUSC/NLL Code 3431 is authorized to work with the shipyard in
formulating a specific recommendation.
d.
To further minimize EMI problems of this nature, the armor on power cables should not
be connected to cabinets containing cables assigned an "S" category in accordance
with this section.
6-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.6
6.6.1
CABLE-TO-CABLE SPACING REQUIREMENTS
Cable-to-Cable Spacing Chart
The cable-to-cable spacing chart shown in figure 6-6 is a set of coordinates used to determine
the required spacing between the various cables. The coordinates consist of radiator and susceptor
designators previously defined in table 6-1. Spacing requirements shown on the chart are given in
inches and are measured between the closest points of the outer sheaths of the cables or between
the closest points of the outer surfaces of the shielding conduit enclosing the individual cables (see
figure 6-9).
6.6.2
Spacing of Multiconductor Cables
When multiconductor cables carry signals falling in more than one radiator category or more
than one susceptor category, the category with the greatest spacing requirement must be used to
determine the spacing.
6.6.3
Spacing of Dual-Function Cables
Spacing assigned to a dual-function cable (radiator and susceptor) must be determined by
both cable category designators assigned to the cable. The dual-function cable is considered to be
compatible within itself by reason of operating one function at a time (for example: transmit or
receive).
6.6.4
Spacing of Cables in Muted Systems
Radiators and susceptors may be run together if the systems connected to the susceptors are
muted (muted here refers to disabling the receiving system during the time that the radiators are
radiating).
6.6.5
Spacing of Single Conductor Cables
Cable designators are not assigned to single conductor cables in this section. Spacing
requirements for installations employing single conductor cables for supply and return circuits must be
considered on a special case basis and approved by NAVSEA (see paragraph 6.2.2) or other
NAVSEA-designated authority. The following are examples of single conductor cable types: TRF,
TRXF, SSGU, SHOF, SRW, and B16.
6.6.6
Spacing of Susceptible Cables with Large Effective Loop Areas
The voltage induced in a susceptible cable is directly proportional to the effective loop area of
that cable. Cable types containing effective loop areas large enough (greater than 0.65 square inch)
to generate impractical spacing requirements are not considered for susceptor application in this
section. When cables of this type are employed for susceptor application, the spacing requirements
must be determined on a special case basis and approved by NAVSEA (see paragraph 6.2.2) or other
NAVSEA-designated authority. Examples of such cable types are: 2SJ7 through 2SJ12, MCOS, and
MMOP.
6.6.7
Spacing of Portable Equipment Cables
These cables are not assigned a category because of the indeterminate spacing
requirements of portable cable.
6-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.6.8
Spacing of Microwave Transmission Lines and Waveguides
Energy transmitted in the microwave region is normally restricted to the interior for the
waveguide or solid wall transmission line. For this reason, waveguides and solid wall transmission
lines are exempt from the spacing requirements of this document.
6.6.9
Installation Practice Regarding Excess Cabling
In addition to the requirements for cable-to-cable spacing, cable installation practices for EMC
require that excess cabling be removed, except where necessary, rather than coiled. The coiling of
cables can compromise cable-to-cable spacing and can result in an increase in common-mode
interference voltage.
6.7
CABLE SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
When the cable-to-cable spacing requirements of figure 6-6 cannot be met, electromagnetic
shielding of cables must be applied using flexible or rigid metal conduit as specified in paragraphs
6.7.3, 6.7.4, and the procedures given in paragraph 6.8. The application of shielding to susceptors S3
and R4 through R8, when spacing requirements cannot be achieved, is to provide 20 dB of shielding
as a minimum requirement. When this minimum requirement is satisfied, zero inches of spacing is
permitted in all cases. Figure 6-7 gives values of shielding effectiveness, based on empirical
measurements, for the rigid and high-permeability, flexible metal conduits. Shield conduit
requirements are primarily dependent upon:
a.
Spacing restrictions,
b.
Frequency band of interest,
c.
Type of shielding material selected, and
d.
Signal level in the susceptible cable.
Wide variations in these parameters dictate the requirement that shielding be determined for each
individual case. In all cases where either flexible or rigid metal conduit can provide the required
shielding, flexible metal conduit shall be used.
6.7.1
Partial Shielding
Flexible or rigid shielding conduit may be used to enclose a portion of a cable run as an
alternative to enclosing the entire cable run. For example, where a sonar cable runs through several
compartments, and where shielding conduit is required in only one of those compartments, then
partial shielding is recommended. However, a sufficient length of shielding conduit must be used to
ensure the EMC of the cable. The use of partial shielding is subject to the following restrictions. (See
figure 6-10.)
a.
The conduit used as a partial shield shall not be less than 4 feet in length.
Reprinted without change
6-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.7.2
b.
The shielding conduit shall extend a minimum of 12 inches beyond the points where
required spacing is achieved. This 12-inch extension requirement applies to both ends
of the shielding conduit except where terminated at an equipment cabinet, bulkhead, or
other enclosure. Such terminations shall employ appropriate transition fittings (see
sections 4 and 5).
c.
The shielding conduit shall be terminated at a point along the cable run located near a
surface which is suitable for providing mechanical support for the conduit end and strain
relief for the cable. The resulting length of the exposed (unshielded) cable between the
conduit end and the equipment cabinet, bulkhead, or other enclosure may vary with
each installation.
d.
Shielding conduit shall be provided mechanical support by being firmly secured using
standard installation methods approved by NAVSEA or other NAVSEA-designated
authority.
e.
Shielding conduit shall be bonded to ground potential in accordance with the applicable
issue of MIL-STD-1310, Standard Practice for Shipboard, Bonding, Grounding, and
Other Techniques for Electromagnetic Compatibility and Safety.
f.
The ends of shielding conduit not terminated with a standard transition fitting will be
treated in the following manner.
(1)
Flexible shielding conduit shall be brazed, soldered, or otherwise treated to
ensure a braid-to-core union and the rough edges removed. Protective
bushings will be installed to physically insulate the shielded cable from the
conduit to prevent cutting or chafing at the conduit end.
(2)
Rigid metal conduit ends shall have the rough edges removed and protective
bushings installed to physically insulate the shielded cable from the conduit.
Magnetic Saturation of Shielding Conduit
Flexible metal conduit enclosing radiators that carry their rated current can saturate flexible
metal conduit to varying degrees causing a partial loss in shielding effectiveness. It is important to
note that when attempting to provide an EMI free installation that the first method is to provide
adequate spacing between radiators and susceptors. If adequate spacing can not be provided, the
second method is to shield the susceptor. If neither of these methods are sufficient the final method
is to shield the radiator. Attempts to shield type R1 and R2 cables with flexible metal conduit must be
considered on a special case basis and approved by NAVSEA (see paragraph 6.2.2). This restriction
does not apply to rigid metal conduit because the magnetic saturation effects are considered
negligible.
6.7.3
Flexible Metal Conduit
High-permeability, flexible metal conduit and associated hardware, specifications,
assembly, and installation instructions shall be as described in sections 3, 4, and 5 and appendix D of
this handbook.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-10
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.7.4
Rigid Metal Conduit
Rigid metal conduit and associated coupling hardware shall be as described in section 2 of this
handbook.
6.7.5
Conduit Grounding/Insulation Requirements
Conduit grounding requirements shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-1310 or as otherwise
specified by NAVSEA (see paragraph 6.2.2 for special case situations).
Grounding requirement details for rigid conduit are in paragraph 2.4.2. Grounding
requirement details for flexible conduit are in paragraph 3.4.5.
6.7.5.1
Single-Point Grounding
a.
The determination of the best grounding configuration of magnetic shielding conduit
(both rigid and flexible) for frequencies between 10 kHz and 100 kHz normally requires
a case-by-case engineering analysis by NUSC/NLL, for example, as authorized by
NAVSEA. With the absence of this analysis, it is recommended the installation
drawings be followed. If there is no direction on the drawings concerning the grounding
configuration, the following recommendation will provide the highest probability of
attaining EMC:
•
For cable categories S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S2-1, S2-2, S2-3, S4-1, S4-2 and S4-3, use
a single-point ground configuration. These are the most sensitive cable categories
and would be susceptible if there were sufficient currents flowing on the conduit.
•
For cable categories other than S1-1, S1-2, S1-3, S2-1, S2-2, S2-3, S4-1, S4-2 and
S4-3, use a multiple-point ground configuration. These cable categories are less
susceptible to the current amplitudes which, experience has revealed, exist on the
conduit. For these cable categories, it is not technically cost-effective to implement
the single-point ground in an all-inclusive manner.
b.
To implement the single-point ground philosophy the ground should be located as
indicated in the installation control drawing or by the other sources noted. If no specific
direction is available, the conduit and associated cable shield shall be electrically
insulated from ground (equipment connection) at the susceptible receiving equipment
end and grounded at the signal source end.
c.
Flexible conduit must be type 2 (rubber jacketed). Any breaches in the jacket, such as
in-line splices or connectors, shall be covered with insulating tape or shrink sleeving to
prevent incidental contact with any ground point.
d.
See figure 5-20 for the RP 2440 non-metallic adapter for electrically isolating conduit.
e.
The armor or conduit on power cables shall not be connected to cabinets containing
circuits whose operation requires cables assigned an "S" category in accordance with
this section.
Reprinted without change
6-11
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.8
PROCEDURES FOR CALCULATING CABLE-TO-CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING
The basic approach for achieving proper cable spacing and shielding is presented in the
following steps.
a.
Determine the amount of cable-to-cable spacing (physical separation) required between
radiator cables and susceptor cables to eliminate coupling.
b.
If adequate spacing between cables is not practical on shipboard, install the susceptor
cables in flexible shielding conduit. With this shielding, reduced spacing is required
between the conduit containing the susceptor cables and the radiator cable or
equipment. Note that shielding of susceptor cables verses the radiator cable is
preferred because:
•
There are fewer susceptor cables.
•
Once shielded, they are protected from relocations or
subsequent installations of nearby radiators.
•
Susceptor cables may be run together in the same conduit, resulting in a potential
cost reduction.
•
Installing the maximum shielding required on susceptor cables reduces the need to
shield both susceptor and radiator cables.
•
Shielding radiator cables in flexible conduit may cause conduit saturation with
subsequent loss of shielding effectiveness.
c.
Where the combination of cable-to-shielded "S" cable spacing is inadequate, keep the
"S" cable enclosed in flexible shielding conduit and enclose the "R" cable in flexible or
rigid shielding conduit. NOTE: Radiator cables having certain "R" designators require
shielding in rigid shielding conduit. (See paragraph 6.7.2.).
d.
The following documents may provide assistance in determining the cable spacing and
shielding requirements. They may be obtained by requesting a copy from the EMC
Branch, Code 3431 of the Naval Underwater Systems Center, Division Newport,
Newport, RI 02841-1708, telephone (401)832-5540 or autovon (920)5540.
(1)
NUSC Technical Memorandum 871161, Dated 2 September 1988, classified
CONFIDENTIAL, provides a listing of equipment design-performance sensitivity
required for the categorization of input signal cables for various government
furnished equipments.
(2)
NUSC Technical Memorandum 811123 of 15 December 1981 provides a
computer program for the HP 85 computer to assist in calculations for cabling
and shielding requirements.
This approach is described in detail in the procedures listed below.
The following two procedures, when properly applied, give the spacing required for cables
without shielding and, if necessary, the shielding conduit required for adequate protection of
susceptible cables. Procedure 1 (paragraph 6.8.1) covers susceptor categories S1, S2, and S4.
Procedure 2 (paragraph 6.8.2) covers susceptor categories S3 and R4 through R8.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-12
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Spacing and shielding calculations are made by following the steps listed in procedures 1 and
2, paragraphs 6.8.1 and 6.8.2 respectively. The right-hand column lists sources of information, within
this section, that pertain to each step. Additional instructions are also given in the right-hand column
to assist in making the calculations.
6.8.1
Procedure 1 - Determining Cable-to-Cable Spacing and Shielding for
Radiators Versus Susceptors in Susceptor Categories S1, S2, and S4
STEP NO.
1
DETERMINE THE FOLLOWING
VALUES
INFORMATION SOURCE OF
INSTRUCTION
Radiator category
Table 6-1.
Radiator group number
Figures 6-1, 6-2, or 6-3.
Susceptor category
Table 6-1.
(If cable type is in susceptor category)
Figures 6-4.
Susceptor group number
Table 6-5. (See note 3.)
3
Spacing requirement without shielding
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates determined
in steps 1 and 2.
4
Spacing restriction (Available spacing is
adequate or inadequate)
If step 4 is equal to or greater than required spacing
in step 3, available spacing is adequate; no
shielding is required.
2
If step 4 is less than required spacing in step 3,
available spacing is inadequate; shielding of
susceptor is required.
5
Conduit shielding effectiveness S(db)
Figure 6-7. Use lowest frequency in passband of
equipment connected to susceptor.
6
V3(dBV)
V3(dBV) = V1(dBV) + S(dB). (See para 6.3k)
7
New susceptor group number for cable
with shielding
Figure 6-5. (See note 4.)
8
Spacing requirement with one cable
shielded
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates determined
in steps 1 and 7.
9
Adequate shielding or inadequate
shielding
If required spacing in step 8 is less than or equal to
available spacing in step 4, adequate shielding has
been provided.
If required spacing in step 8 is greater that available
spacing in step 4, shielding or both cables is
required.
10
Spacing with susceptor and radiator
shielded
Determine by repeating steps 5 through 9.
6-13
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.8.1
Procedure 1 - Determining Cable-to-Cable Spacing and Shielding for
Radiators Versus Susceptors in Susceptor Categories S1, S2, and S4 (Continued)
STEP NO.
DETERMINE THE FOLLOWING
VALUES
=
S(dB) susceptor +
INFORMATION SOURCE OF
INSTRUCTION
Repeated
step 5
S(dB)
Repeated
step 6
V3(dBV)
V3(dBV) - V1(dBV) + S(dB) from repeated-step
5.
Repeated
step 7
New susceptor group number (both
cables shielded)
Figure 6-5. (See note 4.)
Repeated
step 8
Spacing requirement with both cables
shielded
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates
determined in step 1 and repeated-step 7.
Repeated
step 9
Adequate shielding or inadequate
shielding
If required spacing in repeated-step 8 is less
than or equal to available spacing in step 4,
adequate shielding has been provided.
S(dB) radiator
S(dB) susceptor from first step 5.
S(dB) radiator from figure 6-7.
(See paragraph 6.7.2.)
If required spacing in repeated-step 8 is
greater than available spacing in step 4, the
following solutions apply:
6-14
a.
Remove physical restrictions to increase
available spacing.
b.
Reroute radiator and/or susceptor.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.8.1.1
Examples for Procedure 1
Example A
A 400-Hz power cable, type DSGU-75, is to be routed near a susceptible cable, type RG264A/U. The susceptible cable will carry signals in the passband 10 kHz to 80 kHz. The RG-264A/U
cable is connected to a radio receiver with a design performance sensitivity of -175 dBV. Because of
the physical layout of equipment, there is a spacing restriction on these cables of 15 inches.
PROCEDURE
1
STEP NO.
RESULTS AND
CALCULATIONS
NOTES
1
R2-4 (radiator)
Table 6-1 and figure 6-1 (sheet 1)
2
S1-1 (susceptor)
Table 6-1, figure 6-4 (sheet 1), and figure
6-5 (note 3). V1(dBV) = -175.
3
18 inches (spacing w/o shielding)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates R24 and S1-1.
4
15 inches (available spacing)
Installation spacing restriction. Required
spacing in step 3 is greater than available
spacing in step 4; shielding of susceptor is
required.
5
S(dB) = 47 dB
Figure 6-7. Flexible conduit at 10 kHz
(passband is 10 kHz to 80 kHz).
6
V3(dBV)
V3(dBV) = V1(dBV) + S(dB)
= -175 + 47
= -128
7
3 (new group number)
Figure 6-5 (Note 4).
Cable designation is S1-3.
8
10 inches (spacing with shielding)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates R24 and S1-3.
9
Adequate shielding
Shielding is adequate. Required spacing
in step 8 is less than available spacing in
step 4. The 10-inch spacing with shielding
must be maintained as a minimum spacing
requirement.
Reprinted without change
6-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Example B
A 60-Hz power cable, type TSGU-100, is to be routed near an active/passive sonar cable,
type DSS-3. The sonar operates passively in the passband 300 Hz to 10 kHz. The DSS-3 cable
connects the transducers to the preamplifiers, and the preamplifiers have a design performance
sensitivity of -173 dBV. Due to the physical layout of equipment there is a spacing restriction of 5
inches on these cables. This DSS-3 cable is a dual-function cable, but in this example only the
receiving function will be considered.
PROCEDURE
1
STEP NO.
RESULTS AND
CALCULATIONS
NOTES
1
R1-4 (radiator)
Table 6-1 and figure 6-1 (sheet 1)
2
S4-1 (susceptor)
Table 6-1, figure 6-4 (sheet 1), and figure 6-5
(note 3). V1(dBV) = -173.
3
13 inches (spacing w/o
shielding)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates R1-4
and S4-1.
4
5 inches (available spacing)
Installation spacing restriction. Required
spacing in step 3 is greater than available
spacing in step 4; shielding of susceptor is
required.
5
S(dB) = 30 dB
Figure 6-7. Flexible conduit at 300 Hz
(passband is 300 Hz to 10 kHz).
6
V3(dBV)
V3(dBV) = V1(dBV) + S(dB)
7
2 (new group number)
Figure 6-5 (Note 4).
Cable designation is S4-2.
8
10 inches (spacing with
shielding)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates R1-4
and S4-2.
9
5 inches (available spacing)
Required spacing in step 8 is less than
available spacing in step 4. Radiator and
susceptor require shielding.
10
Spacing with susceptor and
radiator shielded
Determine by repeating steps 5 through 9.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-16
= -173 + 30
= -143
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Example B (Continued)
PROCEDURE
1
STEP NO.
Repeated step
5
RESULTS AND
CALCULATIONS
NOTES
S(dB) = S(dB)
susceptor + S(dB)
radiator
Rigid metal conduit used for shielding
radiator (see paragraph 6.7.2).
S(dB)
S(dB) radiator = 35 dB from figure 6-7.
=
30 + 35
=
65
= -173 + 65
S(dB) susceptor = 30 dB from first step 5.
Repeated step
6
V3(dBV)
Repeated step
7
4 (new group number)
Repeated step
8
5 inches (spacing with both
cables shielded)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates R1-4
and S4-4.
Repeated step
9
Adequate shielding
Required spacing in repeated-step 8 is
equal to available spacing in step 4. The 5inch spacing with shielding must be
maintained as a minimum spacing
requirement.
= -108
V3(dBV) = V1(dBV) + S(dB) of repeatedstep 5.
Figure 6-5 (note 4).
Cable designator is S4-4.
6-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.8.2
Procedure 2 - Determining Cable-to-Cable Spacing and Shielding for
Radiators Versus Susceptors in Susceptor Categories S3 and R4 Through
R8
STEP NO.
1
DETERMINE THE
FOLLOWING
VALUES
INFORMATION SOURCE OR
INSTRUCTION
Radiator category
Table 6-1.
Radiator group number
Figures 6-1, 6-2, or 6-3.
Susceptor category
Table 6-1.
Susceptor group number
Figures 6-2, or 6-4
3
Spacing requirement without
shielding
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates
determined in steps 1 and 2.
4
Spacing restriction (Available
spacing is adequate or
inadequate)
If step 4 is equal to or greater than
required spacing in step 3, available
spacing is adequate; no shielding is
required.
2
If step 4 is less than required spacing in
step 3, available spacing is inadequate;
20 dB of shielding of susceptor is
required.
With 20 dB of shielding (minimum value),
zero inches spacing is permissible. (See
paragraph 6-7.)
5
6-18
20 dB conduit shielding
effectiveness S(dB)
(minimum value)
Figure 6-7. 20 dB (minimum value) at
lowest frequency in passband of
equipment connected to susceptible
cable.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.8.2.1
Example for Procedure 2
A 400-Hz power cable, type THOF-150, is routed with a radio receiver cable type RG-14A/U.
The radio receiver cable will carry signals in the passband of 100 kHz to 30 MHz.
PROCEDURE
2
STEP NO.
RESULTS AND
CALCULATIONS
NOTES
1
R2-5 (radiator
Table 6-1 and figure 6-1 (sheet 1)
2
S3 (susceptor)
Table 6-1 and figure 6-4 (sheet 1) Cable
designator is S3.
3
2 inches (spacing w/o
shielding)
Figure 6-6. Intersection of coordinates
R2-5 and S3.
4
0 inches (available spacing)
Step 4 is less than required spacing in
step 3, therefore shielding of susceptor is
required.
5
S(dB) = 136 dB
Figure 6-7. An S(dB) of 136 dB with
flexible conduit has been provided at 100
kHz. This exceeds the 20 dB minimum
value. Zero inches of spacing is
permissible.
6-19
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.9
SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS FOR SUSCEPTIBLE CABLES TO OTHER
INTERFERENCE SOURCES
Special consideration must be given to susceptible cables that are to be routed near
interference sources such as power distribution panels, fluorescent lights, motor generator sets,
motors, transformers, controllers, and equipment cabinets.
6.9.1
Susceptor Categories S1 Through S4
Figure 6-8 provides the spacing and shielding requirements for susceptible cables to
interference sources for the categories and group numbers listed. It is provided as guidance to afford
protection to susceptible cables for the general case. The group numbers (of categories S1, S2, and
S4) not listed in figure 6-8 are permitted zero inches of spacing without shielding.
6.9.2
Susceptor Categories R4 Through R8
Three inches of spacing are required between susceptible cables in these categories and
interference sources listed in paragraph 6.9. When the 3-inch spacing cannot be achieved, shielding
with flexible or rigid metal conduit is required. Cables in this category are permitted zero inches of
spacing when 20 dB of shielding is provided.
6.10
GUIDELINES FOR EMC CABLEWAY DESIGN
The following general guidelines may be used in cableway design to implement the
requirements of this section. Although there are many different cable categories and groups identified
in Section 6, in practice only two separate cableways may be necessary to provide the required
spacing to prevent radiator cables and equipment from inducing EMI into susceptor system cables.
6.10.1
Guidelines for Susceptor Cableway Design
The most sensitive susceptor cables will usually require a cableway separated from radiator
cableways, external shielding conduit or both to prevent EMI. The following information is obtained
from the cable spacing charts, figures 6-6 and 6-8.
a.
Susceptor cables in categories S1, S2, S3 and S4 may be routed together with no
spacing required between them.
b.
If there are radiator cables (see figure 6-6) or interference sources (see figure 6-8)
within 64 inches from the susceptor cable-way, an analysis shall be conducted in
accordance with paragraph 6.8 to determine the spacing required between the radiator
cable and equipment and susceptor cables for the specific situation involved. Route the
susceptor cableway to obtain the necessary spacing. Those susceptor cables with
requirements for zero spacing from radiator cables may be routed in a radiator
cableway.
If the required spacing of figures 6-6 and 6-8 is not practical, recalculate the spacing
requirements with the susceptor cables installed in flexible conduit.
c.
d.
6-20
If the required spacing of figures 6-6 and 6-8 is still not practical, recalculate the spacing
requirements with the susceptor cable installed in flexible conduit inside an additional
short piece of rigid or flexible conduit in a partial shielding application, see paragraph
6.7.1.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
e.
If the required spacing of figure 6-6 is still not practical, recalculate the spacing
requirements with the radiator cables installed in rigid conduit. Partial shielding in
accordance with Paragraph 6.7.1 should be considered where appropriate.
f.
A minimum spacing of 8-inches, where practical, should be maintained between
susceptor and radiator cableways to make an observable spacing which would prevent
cable from being inadvertently routed between the radiator cableway and the susceptor
cableway.
g.
Indirect coupling paths may result from a cable routed with radiator cables for a portion
of its run and then routed with or near susceptor cables for the remainder of its run.
Therefore, cables shall remain in either the radiator cableway or susceptor cableway
and shall not be routed from one to the other.
6.10.2
Guidelines for Radiator Cableway Design
The following information on radiator cableway design is obtained from the cable spacing
chart of figure 6-6.
a.
6.10.3
Radiator cables in categories R1, R2, R3 and R9 may be routed together, without
spacing requirements.
Guidelines for Radiator/Susceptor and Less-Sensitive Susceptor Cable
Cableway Design
Cables that are both radiators and susceptors (radiator/susceptor) and less-sensitive
susceptor cables may be routed in cableways with radiator cables provided spacing requirements are
maintained by installed hardware (spacers).
A possible radiator cableway layout (grouping of cables) which provides minimum cable
spacing for radiator/susceptor cables by means of spacers is shown in the schematic below. The
rectangles represent one-inch and two-inch spacers. The spacers indicated may be of any material
and shape or form that provides and maintains the required spacing, is inexpensive, and has low
flammability and toxicity. Some suggestions are a hollow or corrugated extrusion, "doughnuts", etc.
The minimum spacing requirements for the cable categories shown in the schematic below
apply to cables not enclosed in shielding conduit. If cables are enclosed in shielding conduit, no
spacing is required for that group of cables. The rationale for this cableway layout, based on figure 66, is provided below.
1"
R1, R2
R3, R9
1"
R4
1"
R8
2"
R5
R6, R7
S3
Cableway Schematic Showing Groupings and Spacers
a.
R4 cables require one-inch spacing from the radiator cables R1, R2 and R3 and the
radiator/susceptor cables R5, R6, and R7.
b.
R5, R6 and R7 cables may be routed together.
6-21
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.11
c.
R4 and R8 cables require one-inch spacing from each other and from
radiator/susceptor cables R5, R6 and R7. The radiator/susceptor cables R5, R6 and
R7 require from zero to two-inch spacing from radiator cables R1, R2 and R3.
d.
R8 cables require one-inch spacing from radiator cables R1, R2, R3 and from
radiator/susceptor cables R4, R5, R6 and R7.
e.
R9 cables require zero spacing from radiator cables R1, R2 and R3. (NOTE, R9 may
also be placed with R4, R5, R6, R7, R8 or S1, S2 and S3)
f.
S3 cables require two-inch spacing from radiator cables R1, R2, R3 and from
radiator/susceptor cables R4, R5, R6, R7 and R8.
g.
Note; S1, S2 and S4 cables in cable group numbers 7 and 8 may be routed with the
radiator/susceptor cables R4, R6, R7 and R8 with no spacing required, but require zero
to two-inch spacing from radiator cables R1, R2 and R3. These susceptor cables could
be placed in the S3 or R8 grouping of cables in the above cableway.
h.
Note; for each radiator/susceptor cable category R4 or R5, R6, R7 or R8, the spacers
or shielding conduit or a separate cableway may be used.
CABLE MARKING
All cables which are categorized by the application of the spacing and shielding requirements
of section 6 should be identified by appropriate cable marking to simplify the installation procedure.
Over the life cycle of a ship, cable categorization and marking will provide a significant reduction in
cost by minimizing postinstallation fixes through cable configuration control. Once the cables have
been categorized, wireway design becomes an extension of the cable spacing concept. This concept
has been successfully implemented in the Trident submarine program.
Cable marking should convey specific information that includes (1) the cable number in
accordance with ship's specifications and (2) the cable designator (in accordance with section 6)
which describes the spacing and shielding requirements for a given cable.
Specific requirements for cable marking are listed below:
6-22
a.
These categorized cables shall be identified with cable identification tags containing the
above-mentioned information. The preferred cable identification tag is the metallic or
nylon type that is embossed with raised letters and numbers. This type will ensure
retention of information even after being painted.
b.
Each cable shall have one tag attached to the cable near each end and also wherever
the cable is terminated by connectors, stuffing tubes, etc., at locations such as an
equipment, a junction box, both sides of a bulkhead, etc.
c.
A cable which is enclosed in flexible metal shielding conduit or rigid metal shielding
conduit shall be identified with the cable identification tags mounted on the conduit at
the same locations as described in paragraph b above. The cable identification tag
shall include the cable designator in accordance with table 6-1 that applies to the
unshielded cable.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
d.
A cable which is enclosed in shielding conduit for only part of its entire length (partial
shielding) shall be identified with tags mounted on both the exposed (unshielded)
portion of the cable and on the conduit at the locations described in paragraph b above.
e.
Cables serving a dual purpose (transmitting and receiving) shall be identified with both
radiator and susceptor designators as shown in example 4 below.
f.
A multifunction cable carrying signals that fall in radiator and susceptor categories shall
be classified as both a radiator and a susceptor using the cable designator from figure
6-6 requiring the greatest cable spacing. This cable will be identified with both radiator
and susceptor designators as shown in example 4.
g.
A multifunction cable carrying signals that fall in more than one radiator category or in
more than one susceptor category, shall be classified and marked with only the radiator
or susceptor cable designator from figure 6-6 requiring the greatest cable spacing.
h.
Special case cables shall be identified by adding "S" to the cable designator as shown
in examples 5 and 6.
The following are examples of cable identification tag information.
Example
No.
Cable No.
(iaw ship's spec)
Cable Designator
(iaw table 6-1)
1
R-RR28
(S1-4)
2
R-2SL57
(S4-1)
3
R-RT5
(R4)
4
R-SF58
(S4-1/R3-2)
5
R-3SF4
(S4-2S)
6
R-3F28
(S4-2/R2-3)S
The following EMC cableway caution tag is designed to be attached to cableways containing
susceptor cables to remind ship and shipyard personnel not to inadvertently violate EMC cable
spacing. This tag shall be attached with tie-wraps to the exterior of cableway supports or pans in
visible locations approximately every 5 feet along the cableway. The preferred material for this tag is
metal or nylon colored blue. The tag shall be embossed with raised letters. The letter size for the
words "CAUTION" and "EMC CABLEWAY" shall be approximately 3/16 of an inch high, and the
remainder of the text shall be approximately 1/8 of an inch high.
6-23
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
CAUTION
EMC CABLE WAY
DO NOT ALTER ANY CABLE POSITIONS
OR ADD ANY CABLES UNLESS
AUTHORIZED BY NAVSEA DRAWING
Cableway supports (hangers) and pans for susceptor cableways shall be painted blue.
6-24
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
MIL-C915
CABLE
TYPE
DCOP
DHOF
DNW
DNWA
DPS
DRW
DRWA
DSGA
DSGU
DSS
FHOF
FNW
FNWA
FPS
FSGA
FSGU
FSS
MCOS
MDU
MHOF
MMOP
MNW
MNWA
MS
MSA
MSCA
MSCS
MSCU
MSS
MA
MU
MUS
MWF
TCOP
THOF
TNW
TNWA
TPNW
TPNWA
TPS
TRW
TRWA
TSGA
TSGU
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORIES R1 AND R2
0
ALL
3
3
3
ALL
ALL
3
3
2, 3
3
1
2
3
4
4
4
4
3
6, 9, 14
9, 14
9, 14
4, 6
23, 30
23
23
9, 14
50, 75, 100
50, 75, 100
4
4
4
4
9, 14
9, 14
23, 30, 40
23
50, 60, 75, 100
125, 150, 200
200
9
3
3
42
4, 9
4, 9
60
23
23
14
9
9
133
23
23
50, 75, 100
50, 75, 100
150, 200
150, 200
6
14
23
40, 60
3, 4
3, 4
2, 3
5
6
83
7
9
250, 400
250, 300, 400
300, 400
4
ALL
ALL
2, 5
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
14
14
14
ALL
ALL
3
3
3
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
3
3
4
4
4
6, 9, 14
6, 9, 14
9, 14
23, 30, 40
23
23
50, 75, 100
50, 75, 100
3
4, 6
9, 14
23, 30
4
4
9, 14
9, 14
23, 30, 40
23
50, 60, 75, 100
50, 75, 100
150
150
150
125, 150, 200
150, 200
250, 400
500, 600
250, 300, 400
300, 400
Figure 6-1. Cables in Categories R1 and R2 (Sheet 1 of 3)
6-25
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
MIL-C915
CABLE
TYPE
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORIES R1 AND R2
0
1
TSS
2,3
4
TTRS &
TTRSA
TTSA &
TTSU
2A
ALL
2AU &
2AUS
2SA
2SJ &
2SJA
2SU &
2SUS
2SWA
5
6
7
9
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
2SWU &
2SWUA
3SA
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
4SJ &
4SJA
5KVTSGA
ALL
5KVTSGU
6SGA &
6SGU
7PS
7SGA &
7SGU
7SS
4
ALL
2SWF
3SWU &
3SWUS
3U & 3UA
3
ALL
2SWAU
3SJ &
3SJA
3SU &
3SUS
3SWA
2
150, 200, 250
300, 350, 400
150, 200, 250
300, 350, 400
ALL
ALL
ALL
2
1.
THE NUMBERS FOUND IN THE GROUP NUMBER COLUMNS 0 THROUGH 7, AND 9 ARE CABLE-TYPE
SUFFIX NUMBERS (RELATED TO THE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CABLE). EXAMPLE: A
DHOF-83 CABLE IS FOUND IN ROW 2, GROUP NUMBER COLUMN 5. THUS A DHOF-83 CABLE IS ASSIGNED
CABLE DESIGNATOR R1-5 IF IT CARRIES 60Hz POWER OR R2-5 IF IT CARRIES 400Hz POWER.
2. THE WORD ALL MEANS ALL CABLES OF THAT TYPE FALL IN THE SAME GROUP. EXAMPLE: IN ROW 1, ALL
DCOP CABLES FALL IN GROUP NUMBER 0. THUS ALL DCOP CABLES ARE ASSIGNED CABLE DESIGNATOR
R1-0 IF THEY CARRY 60 Hz POWER, OR R2-0 IF THEY CARRY 400Hz POWER.
*3. MOST MIL-C-915 CABLES HAVE AN EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 LOW-SMOKE VERSION. WHERE AN
EQUIVALENT VERSION DOES EXIST, SIMPLY ADD THE LETTERS “LS” (FOR LOW-SMOKE) IN FRONT OF
THE MIL-C-915 CABLE TYPE TO GET THE EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 CABLE TYPE. FOR EXAMPLE, LSDCOP
IS THE LOW-SMOKE VERSION OF DCOP AND IS ASSIGNED THE SAME CATEGORY AND GROUP NUMBERS
AS THE CDOP.
Figure 6-1. Cables in Categories R1 and R2 (Sheet 2 of 3)
6-26
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*MIL-C-24640
(LIGHTWEIGHT)
CABLE TYPE
DX
DXA
DXW
DXOW
DXWA
FX
FXA
FXW
FXWA
MXSO
MXCW
MXCOW
MXCWA
MXO
TTXS
TTXSA
TTXSO
TTXW
TTXOW
TTXWA
TX
TXA
TXW
TXWA
2XAO
2XS
2XSA
2XSO
2XSAW
2XSAOW
2XSAWA
2XSW
2XSOW
2XSWA
3XS
3XSA
3XSW
3XSOW
3XSWA
7XW
7XWA
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORIES R1 AND R2
0
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
2, 9, 21, 37
ALL
ALL
ALL
10, 14
2, 4
2, 4
2, 6, 8, 10
ALL
ALL
ALL
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
3, 7, 14
ALL
3, 7, 14
1, 3, 7
3, 7, 12, 19, 30
1, 3, 7
7
7
3, 7, 10, 14
ALL
3, 7, 10, 14
3, 4
3, 4
1
2
3
4
Figure 6-1. Cables in Categories R1 and R2 (Sheet 3 of 3)
6-27
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*
**
***
THIS CABLE UNSHIELDED, USE FOR ROTOR EXCITATION ONLY.
THE R5 CATEGORY CABLES SELECTED SHOULD BE OF THE SHIELDED TYPES WHEN THEY ARE TO BE
RUN IN WIREWAYS WITH POWER CABLES.
MOST MIL-C-915 CABLES HAVE AN EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 LOW-SMOKE VERSION. WHERE AN
EQUIVALENT VERSION DOES EXIST SIMPLY ADD THE LETTERS “LS” (FOR LOW-SMOKE) IN FRONT OF
THE MIL-C-915 CABLE TYPE TO GET THE EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 CABLE TYPE. FOR EXAMPLE, LSTTRS
IS THE LOW-SMOKE VERSION OF TTRS AND IS ASSIGNED THE SAME CATEGORY AND GROUP NUMBERS
AS THE TTRS.
Figure 6-2. Cables in Categories R3 Through R8 (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-28
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
Figure 6-2. Cables in Categories R3 Through R8 (Sheet 2 of 2)
6-29
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*MIL-C-915
CABLE
TYPE
DCOP
DHOF
DNW & DNWA
DPS
DRW & DRWA
DSGA & DSGU
DSS
FHOF
FNW & FNWA
FPS
FSGA & FSGU
FSS
MA
MCOS
MDU
MHOF
MMOP
MNW & MNWA
MS & MSA
MSCA
MSCS & MSCU
MSS
MU & MUS
TCOP
THOF
TNW & TNWA
TPNW &
TPNWA
TPS
TRW & TRWA
TSGA & TSGU
TSS
TTSU
2A & 2AU
2AUS
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORY R9
1
ALL
3, 4, 6, 9, 14
3, 4, 9, 14
3, 4, 6
ALL
3, 4, 9, 14
2, 3, 4
3, 4, 9
3
2
3
23, 30
23, 50, 75, 100
9
83, 250, 400
23, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400
42, 60
4, 9, 23
14
3, 4, 9
133
6
14, 23, 40, 60
23, 50, 75, 100, 150, 200
2, 3, 4
14
ALL
ALL
2, 5
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
14
ALL
3, 4, 6, 9, 14
3, 4, 9, 14
ALL
3, 4, 6
ALL
3, 4, 9, 14
2, 3, 4
ALL
ALL
ALL
23, 30
23, 50, 75, 100
150, 250, 400
150
9, 14, 23, 30
23, 30, 40, 50, 60, 75, 100
125, 150, 200, 250, 300, 400
Figure 6-3. Cables in Category R9 (Sheet 1 of 3)
6-30
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*MIL-C-915
CABLE
TYPE
2SA
2SJ & 2SJA
2SU & 2SUS
2SWA & 2SWAU
2SWF
2SWU & 2SWUA
2U & 2UA
2WA & 2 WAU
3SA
3SJ & 3SJA
3SU & 3SUS
3SWA
3SWU & 3SWUS
3U & 3UA
4SJ & 4SJA
5KVTSGA
5KVTSGU
6SGA & 6SGU
7PS
7SGA & 7SGU
7SS
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORY R9
1
2
3
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
150, 200, 250, 300, 350, 400
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
NOTES:
1. THE NUMBERS FOUND IN THE GROUP NUMBER COLUMNS 1 THROUGH 3 ARE CABLE-TYPE SUFFIX
NUMBERS (RELATED TO THE ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE CABLE). EXAMPLE: A DHOF-23 OR
A DHOF-30 CABLE IS FOUND IN ROW 2, GROUP NUMBER COLUMN 2.
2. THE WORD ALL MEANS ALL CABLE S OF THAT TYPE FALL IN THE SAME GROUP. EXAMPLE: IN ROW 1 ALL
DCOP CABLES FALL IN GROUP NUMBER 1.
3. CABLES THAT CARRY DC USED FOR SIGNAL OR CONTROL FUNCTIONS SHALL BE OF THE SHIELDED
CABLE TYPES LISTED.
4. MOST MIL-C-915 CABLES HAVE AN EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 LOW-SMOKE VERSION. WHERE AN
EQUIVALENT VERSION DOES EXIST SIMPLY ADD THE LETTERS “LS” (FOR LOW-SMOKE) IN FRONT OF
THE MIL-C-915 CABLE TYPE TO GET THE EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 CABLE TYPE. FOR EXAMPLE, LS2SA
IS THE LOW-SMOKE VERSION OF 2SA AND IS ASSIGNED THE SAME CATEGORY AND GROUP NUMBERS
AS THE 2SA.
Figure 6-3. Cables in Category R9 (Sheet 2 of 3)
6-31
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*MIL-C-24640
(LIGHTWEIGHT)
CABLE
TYPE
DX
DXA
DXW
DXOW
DXWA
FX
FXA
FXW
FXWA
MXSO
MXCW
MXCOW
MXCWA
MXO
TTXW
TTXOW
TTXWA
TX
TXA
TXW
TXWA
1XSOW
2XAO
2XO
2XOW
2XS
2XSA
2XSO
2XSAW
2XSAOW
2XSAWA
2XSW
2XSOW
2XSWA
2XSXO
3XS
3XSA
3XSW
3XSOW
3XSWA
7XW
7XWA
GROUP NUMBERS FOR CABLE CATEGORY R9
1
2
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
2, 9, 21, 37
ALL
ALL
ALL
10, 14
ALL
ALL
ALL
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
3, 4
ALL
2, 7, 10, 18, 40
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
ALL
3, 7, 14
ALL
3, 7, 14
1, 3, 7
3, 7, 12, 19,30
1, 3, 7
4
7
7
3, 7, 10, 14
3, 7, 10, 14, 19, 24
3, 7, 10, 14
3, 4
3, 4
Figure 6-3. Cables in Category R9 (Sheet 3 of 3)
6-32
3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
*
**
***
SEE FIGURE 6-5 FOR GROUP NUMBER.
ALL RG CABLES EXCEPT RG-220, RG-221, RG-294, AND RG-296. SPACING REQUIREMENTS FOR CABLES
RG-330, RG-221, RG-294, AND RG-296 MUST BE HANDLED ON A SPECIAL CASE BASIS.
MOST MIL-C-915 CABLES HAVE AN EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 LOW-SMOKE VERSION. WHERE AN
EQUIVALENT VERSION DOES EXIST SIMPLY ADD THE LETTERS “LS” (FOR LOW-SMOKE) IN FRONT OF
THE MIL-C-915 CABLE TYPE TO GET THE EQUIVALENT MIL-C-24643 CABLE TYPE. FOR EXAMPLE, LSTTRS
IS THE LOW-SMOKE VERSION OF TTRS AND IS ASSIGNED THE SAME CATEGORY AND GROUP NUMBERS
AS THE TTRS.
Figure 6-4. Cables in Categories S1 Through S4 (Sheet 1 of 2)
6-33
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
MIL-C-24640
CABLE TYPE
* THE S1 CATEGORY IS TYPICALLY ASSIGNED TO RG CABLES (PER MIL-C-17). SINCE THERE
ARE NO LIGHTWEIGHT VERSIONS OF RG CABLES, NONE OF THE MIL-C-24640 CABLES ARE
ASSIGNED THE S1 CATEGORY.
Figure 6-4. Cables in Categories S1 Through S4 (Sheet 2 of 2)
6-34
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
CATEGORY
GROUP
NUMBER
S1, S2, S4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GROUP VOLTAGE V2
-180 TO -160 dBV (1.0 to 10 nanovolts)
-160 TO -140 dBV (10 to 100 nanovolts)
-140 TO -120 dBV (0.1 to 1.0 microvolts)
-120 TO -100 dBV (1.0 to 10 microvolts)
-100 TO -80 dBV (10 to 100 microvolts)
-80 TO -60 dBV (0.1 to 1.0 millivolts)
-60 TO -40 dBV (1.0 to 10 millivolts)
-40 TO -20 dBV (0.01 to 0.1 volts)
NOTES:
1. EQUIPMENT DESIGN PERFORMANCE SENSITIVITY, V1 (dBV), WILL NORMALLY BE SUPPLIED BY THE
EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER, OR IT CAN BE OBTAINED FROM GOVERNMENT OR CONTRACTOR
FURNISHED INFORMATION. A LIMITED LIST OF CATEGORIZED INPUT SIGNAL CABLING FOR
EXISTING GFE ABOARD SSN AND SSBN SHIPS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM (CONFIDENTIAL) NUSC
TECH. MEMO NO. 871161 DTD 2 SEPT 1988.
2.
WHEN THE EQUIPMENT DESIGN PERFORMANCE SENSITIVITY, V1 (dBV), IS GREATER THAN -20 dBV
(0.1 VOLTS), FOR EXAMPLE: -10 dBV, THE ASSOCIATED CABLE MUST BE ASSIGNED AN "R"
CATEGORY.
3.
CABLE SPACING WITHOUT SHIELDING.
TO ESTABLISH THE GROUP NUMBER FOR CATEGORIES S1, S2, OR S4, LOCATE THE GROUP
VOLTAGE V2 (dBV) THAT INCLUDES V1 (dBV). THE GROUP NUMBER ASSOCIATED WITH THIS GROUP
VOLTAGE WILL BE THE GROUP NUMBER FOR THE SUSCEPTOR CATEGORY.
4.
CABLE SPACING WITH SHIELDING.
TO ESTABLISH THE GROUP NUMBER FOR CATEGORIES S1, S2, OR S4, LOCATE THE GROUP
VOLTAGE V2 (dBV) THAT INCLUDES V3 (dBV). THE GROUP NUMBER ASSOCIATED WITH THIS GROUP
VOLTAGE WILL BE THE GROUP NUMBER FOR THE SUSCEPTOR CATEGORY.
5.
IN A SITUATION WHERE THE EQUIPMENT DESIGN PERFORMANCE SENSITIVITY, V1 (dBV), CANNOT
BE OBTAINED, WITH NAVSEA APPROVAL THE FOLLOWING GUIDE MAY BE EMPLOYED AS A LAST
RESORT. IT MUST BE UNDERSTOOD THAT THIS MAY LEAD TO AN EXCESSIVE SPACING AND
SHIELDING REQUIREMENT, HENCE SHOULD BE USED SPARINGLY.
a.
LOW-LEVEL RECEIVING SIGNALS (NON-AMPLIFIED), SUCH AS SONAR, RADIO, NAVIGATION: V1
= -170 dBV
b.
LOW-LEVEL RECEIVING SIGNALS (AMPLIFIED), SUCH AS SONAR, RADIO, NAVIGATION:
V1 = -150 dBV
c.
LOW-LEVEL SENSOR SIGNALS (NON-AMPLIFIED), SUCH AS STRAIN GAGES, RTD'S,
ACCELEROMETERS, MICROPHONES, THERMOCOUPLES, ETC.: V1 = -110 dBV
d.
LOW-LEVEL SENSOR SIGNALS (AMPLIFIED), SUCH AS STRAIN GAGES, RTD'S,
ACCELEROMETERS, MICROPHONES, THERMOCOUPLES, ETC.: V1 = -90 dBV
BECAUSE OF THE APPROXIMATION, THE RESULTING CABLE DESIGNATOR IS CONSIDERED A
SPECIAL CASE AND SHOULD BE MARKED ACCORDINGLY.
Figure 6-5.
Categories S1, S2, and S4, Group Numbers
and Associated Group Voltages
Reprinted without change
6-35
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
0
R
1
A
2
D
3
I R1 4
A
5
T
6
O
7
R
9
0
C
1
A
2
B
3
L R2 4
E
5
6
D
7
E
9
S
1
I R3 2
G
3
N R4
A R5
T
1
O R6 2
R
1
R7 2
R8
1
R9 2
3
S1
4 5
1
2
3
3
4
3
3
2
3
1
2
6
9
13
19
25
5
3
6
4
9
6
13
8
18 11
33
46
5
5
SUSCEPTOR CABLE DESIGNATOR
S2
S3
S4
3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5
6
7
8
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
3
3
2
3
1
2
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
4
4
2
3
5
7
8
1
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
5
3
6
4
9
6
13
8
18 11
2
3
5
7
8
1
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
23 13
31 18
4
3
4
3
9
9
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
23 13
31 18
4
3
4
3
9
9
3
3
3
3
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
9
12
18
25
34
7
4
10
7
14 10
20 15
27 20
3
5
7
10
13
3
4
5
7
8
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
7
4
10
7
14 10
20 15
27 20
3
5
7
10
13
3
4
5
7
8
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
45
64
4
5
7
35 25
49 34
4
3
4
4
6
5
15 12
20 10
2
2
3
2
4
3
5
4
1
2
3
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
35 25
49 34
4
3
4
4
6
5
15 12
20 10
2
2
3
2
4
3
5
4
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
R4 R5
6
7
8
R7 R8
1 2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
6
9
13
19
26
5
3
7
4
10 6
14 9
19 12
3
4
5
7
8
1
2
2
3
4
1
1
1
1
2
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
34
47
4
5
25 15 11
33 19 10
3
3
2
4
3
3
4
3
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
2
8
11
17
23
32
6
4
3
9
6
4
13 9
6
18 13
8
25 17 11
2
3
5
7
8
1
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
42
59
4
4
6
32 23 13
45 31 17
3
2
2
4
3
2
5
4
3
9
8
1
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
2
7
2
2
1
3
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
1
3
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
2
3
3
2
7
2
2
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
3
14
4
0
0
2
7
3
0
0
1
4
2
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
7
3
0
0
1
4
2
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
2
0
0
3
12
3
3
6
2
7
2
2
5
1
3
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
16
8
3
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
NOTES:
1. SPACING REQUIREMENTS SHOWN ON THE CHART ARE IN INCHES AND MEASURED BETWEEN THE
CLOSEST SURFACE OF THE OUTER SHEATH OR SHIELD CONDUIT OF THE INDIVIDUAL CABLES.
(SEE FIGURE 6-9).
2.
R6
1 2
DATA IN THIS FIGURE HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM THE ORIGINAL S9407-AB-HBK-010.
Figure 6-6. Spacing Chart for Radiator and Susceptor Cables
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-36
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 6-7. Shielding Effectiveness of Conduit Versus Frequency
6-37
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. 400-Hz SOURCES INCLUDE POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS, MOTOR GENERATOR SETS, MOTORS,
TRANSFORMERS, CONTROLLERS, AND EQUIPMENT CABINETS.
2.
60-Hz SOURCES INCLUDE POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELS, FLOURESCENT LIGHTS, MOTOR
GENERATOR SETS, MOTORS, TRANSFORMERS, CONTROLLERS, AND EQUIPMENT CABINETS.
3.
SEE PARAGRAPHS 6.7.3 AND 6.7.4 FOR SPECIFIED FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT AND RIGID METAL
CONDUIT RESPECTIVELY.
4.
EXAMPLE OF CHART USE: A SUSCEPTOR CABLE HAVING THE DESIGNATOR S4-1, AND SHIELDED IN
FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT IS TO BE ROUTED NEAR A 60-Hz POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL. THE
INTERSECTION OF THE “S4-1” COLUMN AT THE “60-Hz SOURCES-FLEX CONDUIT” LINE INDICATES A
SPACING OF 3 INCHES.
5.
SPACING REQUIREMENTS SHOWN ON THE CHART ARE GIVEN IN INCHES AND ARE MEASURED
FROM THE OUTER SURFACE OF THE SHIELDING CONDUIT OR CABLE TO THE NEAREST SURFACE
OF THE INTERFERENCE SOURCE. (SEE FIGURE 6-9).
Figure 6-8.
6-38
Spacing and Shielding Chart for Susceptible Cables
(Categories S1 Through S4) to Interference Sources
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 6-9. Measurement of Cable Spacing Distances
Figure 6-10. Partial Shielding Installation
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
6-39/6-40
SECTION 7
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES, BONDING AND GROUNDING
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 7
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES, BONDING AND GROUNDING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.3.1
7.3.2
7.3.2.1
7.3.2.2
7.3.3
7.3.4
7.3.5
7.3.5.1
7.3.5.2
7.3.6
7.3.6.1
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
7.6.4
7.6.5
7.7
7.8
Page
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................
SCOPE .......................................................................................................................
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES.......................................................................................
Magnetic Saturation of Materials ............................................................................
Shielding Effectiveness of Materials.......................................................................
Example Demonstrating Shielding Principles as Applied
to Enclosure Requirements ....................................................................................
Materials for Enclosures .........................................................................................
Low-Carbon Steel Enclosures ................................................................................
Mumetal Enclosures ...............................................................................................
Annealing of Mumetal Enclosures ..........................................................................
Preparation for Heat-Treatment of Mumetal...........................................................
Instructions for Heat-Treatment of Mumetal...........................................................
Finish ......................................................................................................................
Finish at Enclosure-Cover Interface .......................................................................
RECOMMENDED WIRING PRACTICES FOR USE IN
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES.......................................................................................
METHOD FOR PLUGGING HOLE IN STEEL ENCLOSURE ....................................
TERMINATIONS AT HULL FITTINGS .......................................................................
90-Degree Capped Elbow Termination ..................................................................
Two-Branch Assembly Termination .......................................................................
Three-Branch Assembly Termination.....................................................................
Tailpiece for Hull-Fitting Termination......................................................................
MX-7637/U Stuffing Tube Termination Adapter .....................................................
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE USE OF ALUMINUM OR STEEL
CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES.......................................................................
BONDING AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS .....................................................
7-1
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-5
7-5
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-6
7-15
7-16
7-16
7-16
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-20
7-27
7-27
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
7-1
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
Page
Skin Depth Versus Frequency ....................................................................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 1 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 2 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 3 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 4 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 5 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 6 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 7 of 8) ...............................................
Terminal Box for Shielded Applications (Sheet 8 of 8) ...............................................
Wiring Practice for Minimizing Pickup Loop Areas
Inside Shielding Enclosure..........................................................................................
7-4
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-17
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-i
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS (Cont'd)
Page
Figure
7-4
7-5
7-6
7-7
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
Wiring Practice for Maintaining Spacing Between
Conductors Inside Shielding Enclosure ......................................................................
Wiring Practice for Shielded Twisted Pairs Inside
Shielding Enclosure ....................................................................................................
Hole Plug for Steel Enclosure .....................................................................................
Components for 90-Degree Capped Elbow Termination............................................
Components for Two-Branch Assembly Termination .................................................
Components for Three-Branch Assembly Termination ..............................................
Tailpiece for Hull-Fitting Termination ..........................................................................
Adapter for Stuffing-Tube Type MX-7637/U ...............................................................
Spacing Requirements of Section 6 for Aluminum or
Steel Connectors and Backshells ...............................................................................
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-ii
7-18
7-19
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-25
7-27
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Section 7
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES, BONDING AND GROUNDING
7.1
INTRODUCTION
This section covers the requirements for construction and application of metal enclosures,
such as terminal boxes, junction boxes, and connector hardware, that are used to shield cable
terminations and electrical components from external electromagnetic radiation. The boxes also
serve to attenuate electromagnetic radiation produced by electrical components enclosed within the
box.
In an installation where a terminal box (or junction box) is located in a cable run which is
completely enclosed in shielding conduit, that box shall be considered an extension of the shielding
conduit and shall be manufactured of a material and thickness which provides, as a minimum, the
same shielding effectiveness as the shielding conduit.
7.2
SCOPE
This section contains details on the construction of shielding enclosures such as materials,
shielding effectiveness, and annealing instructions. This section also covers installation procedures
such as wiring practices and grounding requirements.
The shielding procedures in this section are limited primarily to enclosures in the below-decks
shipboard environment, and are directed primarily toward the low-frequency portion of the spectrum.
The reasons for this are:
a.
Effective shielding against magnetic fields is more difficult to achieve at low frequencies
than at high frequencies. The greater "skin depth" at low frequencies dictates a
requirement for thicker material to obtain the necessary protection.
b.
The bulk of below-deck EMI problems are related to the shipboard power system and
occur at frequencies below 100 kHz.
c.
EMI problems are more tractable at frequencies above 100 kHz.
This section does not cover shielding enclosures employed in the topside shipboard
environment that require additional considerations. The two major considerations and requirements
are:
a.
A 360-degree bonding of the shielding conduit at the enclosure penetration must be
installed to protect electrical and electronic circuits from electromagnetic radiation from
transmitting antennas, lightning, and electromagnetic pulse (EMP).
b.
The enclosures must be made weather tight to maintain EMC.
7-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.3
SHIELDING ENCLOSURES
Placing sensitive circuits in metal enclosures protects them from interference caused by
electromagnetic fields. The type, thickness, and electromagnetic properties of the metal used in
enclosure design determine the extent of such protection. Energy leakage through gaps and
discontinuities in the enclosure reduce the amount of desired protection and must be minimized during
design. Magnetic saturation of the shielding material can further reduce protection and must also be a
design consideration. The following paragraphs provide guidance for the design and installation of
effective shielding enclosures.
7.3.1
Magnetic Saturation of Materials
Shielding materials are often spoken of as magnetically hard or magnetically soft, indicating a
low or high permeability characteristic respectively. The magnetizing force required for saturation is
usually much greater for materials possessing low permeabilities. As the applied magnetizing force is
increased beyond saturation, the shielding effectiveness of a material is reduced. This condition is to
be avoided if at all possible.
The flexible shielding conduit described in section 3 and the mumetal enclosures discussed in
this section can be considered magnetically soft. They saturate at a relatively low magnetizing force
that is dependent upon the condition of the material. Rolled sheet and low carbon steel shielding
materials are not quite as soft and possess much lower permeabilities than flexible conduit or
mumetal and therefore require a much greater magnetizing force for saturation.
The magnetizing force, or field intensity, of the interference source to be shielded against is
always a factor to be considered in shielding problems. The magnitude of the interference source
should not exceed published values given for saturation of a particular material.
7.3.2
Shielding Effectiveness of Materials
The absorption loss (or penetration loss as it is sometimes called) is that loss due to the
attenuation experienced by an alternating, tangential magnetic field as it penetrates the shielding
material. Absorption loss is usually the dominant factor in the design of shielding enclosures and, as
such, dictates selection of the type and thickness of the material necessary to provide adequate
shielding effectiveness.
A changing magnetic field tangentially incident on a conducting surface causes current to flow
in the material; the current, in turn, tends to reduce the field at increasing depths within the material. If
the field is alternating, there is never time for the field to become completely established, and the
higher the frequency the more the current will be concentrated near the surface of the material. This
phenomenon is called "skin effect."
7-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
The depth within the conducting material, where current is reduced by a factor of
e-1, or by approximately 37 percent of its surface value, is referred to as one "skin depth," and is
determined from
δ=
1
meters,
π fµmσ m
(1)
where in mks units:
f = frequency in hertz
µm = permeability of material in henries/meter
sm = conductivity of material in siemens/meter.
The absorption loss in dB for one "skin depth" is
A (dB) = 20 log10 e1 = 8.686 dB .
(2)
For a shield of any thickness this becomes
A (dB) = 20 log10 et/ δ= 8.686 t/δ dB ,
(3)
where t = thickness of material in the same units as d.
For calculations where relative values of conductivity and permeability are used, equation (3)
can be equated to
A (dB) = 3.34 t fµrσ r ,
(4)
where relative values are:
µr =
µm
= permeability of material relative to that of
µo
6
(µo = 1.26 x 10- henries/meter)
σ
σ r = σ m = conductivity of material relative to that
cu
7
(σ cu = 5.8 x 10 siemens/meter).
Figure 7-1 is a plot of skin depth (equation 1) versus frequency for typical shielding materials
and for the ratio of t/d equal to 1 (where d is given in inches). Although the permeability of ferrous
materials is inversely related to frequency, it is plotted as a constant value in figure 7-1. As the
number of "skin depths" increases with frequency, adequate shielding can usually be achieved despite
this decrease in material permeability. If, however, the permeability of the material at the frequency of
the interference is known, the absorption loss can be calculated using equation (3) or (4).
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. MONEL IS A NICKEL-COPER ALLOY (67% Ni; 30% Cu).
2. PERMALLOY 45 IS A NICKEL-IRON ALLOY (45% Ni; 55% Fe).
3. MUMETAL IS A NICKEL-COPPER ALLOY (76% Ni; 6% Cu).
Figure 7-1. Skin Depth Versus Frequency
Reprinted without change
7-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.3.2.1
Example Demonstrating Shielding Principles as Applied to Enclosure
Requirements
The following example of an interference problem illustrates a typical requirement for a
shielding enclosure.
A sonar system shows that interference is present in the signal pass-band. The interference
is 40 dB above the equipment design performance sensitivity, seriously degrading operational
capability. Tests show that external interference is magnetically induced into the system via a brass
junction box having a wall thickness (t) of 11 gauge (0.120 inch).
From figure 7-1, at a frequency of 2 kHz, the skin depth (δ) for brass is 0.115 inch. From
equation (3) of paragraph 7.3.2 the attenuation provided by the brass junction box is
A (dB) = 8.686 X(
0.120
) = 9.06 dB
0.115
A junction box made of some other material which provides an attenuation of 40 dB greater
than that provided by the brass junction box is required for adequate shielding. Hot- or cold-rolled, 11gauge sheet steel is readily available, and is of the minimum allowable thickness approved for
construction of shielding enclosures.
From figure 7-1, at a frequency of 2 kHz, the skin depth (δ) for hot- or cold-rolled steel is
approximately 0.010 inch. From equation (3) of paragraph 7.3.2 the attenuation provided by a steel
junction box having a wall thickness of 11 gauge (0.120 inch) is
A (dB) = 8.686 X(
0.120
) = 104 dB
0.010
This steel junction box will provide more shielding than that required to protect the sonar
circuits. The 104 dB of attenuation is in excess of the 9.06 dB provided by the brass junction box and
the 40 dB of interference by the amount determined as
Excess A (dB) = 104 dB -(9.06 dB + 40 dB) = 55 dB .
7.3.2.2
Materials for Enclosures
A comparison of the shielding effectiveness in terms of "skin depth" of various ferrous and
nonferrous metals is presented in figure 7-1. Note that stainless steel and monel are not effective
shields for the frequencies plotted, and brass, aluminum, and copper are undesirable as shielding
materials against 60-Hz and 400-Hz power frequencies. Permalloy 45 and mumetal are more
effective as shields against low frequency magnetic fields than unannealed low-carbon steel of the
same thickness. Other materials not shown in figure 7-1, such as Permalloy 78.5 (78.5% Ni, 21.5%
Fe) and Hipernom (80% Ni, 4.2% Mo, 15% Fe) possess skin depth characteristics between the values
shown for Permalloy 45 and mumetal. These materials may also be used for constructing shielding
enclosures. However, the shielding effectiveness of these medium- and high-permeability alloys is
affected by mechanical shock. If an enclosure made of one of these annealed metals is machined,
dropped, or otherwise subjected to mechanical shock, the enclosure must be reannealed. Therefore,
in light of the difficulty in assuring protection from the hazards of mechanical shock, the use of
enclosures made from these materials is discouraged.
Of the shielding materials noted in figure 7-1, mumetal and low-carbon steel shall be used in
ships. Of the two, low-carbon steel (hot- or cold- rolled) is preferred because it is not as shocksensitive as mumetal.
7-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.3.3
Low-Carbon Steel Enclosures
Low-carbon steel enclosures shall be fabricated from either hot- or cold-rolled steel, in
accordance with Federal Specification QQ-S-698. The thickness of the steel shall be a minimum of
11 gauge (0.1196 inch) using the manufacturers' standard gauge for sheet steel. Annealing of lowcarbon steel enclosures is not required. A good example of a steel enclosure is presented in figure 72 (sheets 1 through 8) which is a copy of drawings 2630-102-01 and 2630-102-02 entitled "Terminal
Box for Shielded Applications." This greatly reduced copy is included for reference purposes rather
than for construction.
7.3.4
Mumetal Enclosures
Figure 7-1 shows that mumetal enclosures will provide greater shielding effectiveness than
low-carbon steel enclosures of the same thickness. Mumetal enclosures can provide the same
shielding effectiveness as low-carbon steel enclosures but with less metal thickness. The thickness of
a typical mumetal enclosure is 0.062 inch for the box and 0.075 inch for the cover. The shielding
effectiveness of mumetal is extremely sensitive to shock. If a mumetal enclosure which has been
annealed is later formed, dropped, machined, or otherwise subjected to mechanical shock, the
enclosure must be reannealed to restore its shielding effectiveness.
An approved design for mumetal terminal boxes can be obtained from BUSHIPS Drawing No.
SSB(N)616-404-2091704, "Mumetal Connection and Pull Boxes; Assembly and Details."
7.3.5
Annealing of Mumetal Enclosures
To develop optimum magnetic properties, mumetal must be annealed after all fabricating
operations have been completed. Contamination by oxygen, sulfur, or carbon must be prevented
during the annealing cycle. In specific applications in which a part cannot be fully annealed due to
physical reasons, a compromise treatment may be given. Less than full annealing, however, will
obviously result in less than optimum magnetic properties. The method of annealing in a dry
hydrogen atmosphere is presented in the following paragraphs.
7.3.5.1
Preparation for Heat-Treatment of Mumetal
a.
7-6
Complete all mechanical operations (such as drilling, punching, grinding) prior to
annealing.
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7-7
7-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7-9
7-10
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7-11
7-12
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7-13
7-14
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
b.
Completely remove oil, graphite, or other carbon- or sulfur-bearing material from parts
prior to annealing.
c.
Support the parts by suitable means to minimize warping or bending during the
annealing process.
d.
Separate the laminations by means of a pure calcined aluminum oxide powder or a
suitable equivalent. (Annealing nickel-iron steels at temperatures above 1600° F,
particularly in a hydrogen atmosphere, may cause sticking of the laminations and parts.)
7.3.5.2
Instructions for Heat-Treatment of Mumetal
a.
Pack the laminations or parts in a completely welded box that has only two openings
through which the hydrogen enters and leaves the box.
WARNING
As a safety precaution, it is necessary to purge with nitrogen before
and after the annealing cycle.
b.
Anneal only in pure dry hydrogen produced by the electrolytic process, passed over a
copper or palladium catalyst, with the moisture removed by activated alumina,
phosphorous pentoxide, or other drying agent so that the dew point of the gas is
reduced to at least -60° F. The dry hydrogen atmosphere should be well circulated with
a minimum flow rate of 10 times the volume of the retort per hour. (A significantly lower
flow rate will not be adequate to completely purify the shielding material.)
c.
Heat the charge to 2150° F at any convenient rate. After the charge is uniformly
heated, hold it at 2150° F for 4 hours. Furnace cool at the rate of 200° F per hour to
600° F. Purge with nitrogen, after which the charge can be withdrawn from the furnace.
NOTE
Mumetal which is annealed at 1850° F for 4 hours is approximately
50 percent as effective as that annealed at the normal 2150° F
temperature.
Annealing can be accomplished in atmospheres other than pure dry
hydrogen, but with poorer results. For example, annealing in a
mixture of 80 percent hydrogen and 20 percent nitrogen produces
magnetic properties approximately 80 percent as effective as when
annealing in pure dry hydrogen. Annealing in a vacuum develops
properties between 50 percent and 75 percent as effective as those
attained in a hydrogen atmosphere. Annealing in a pure nitrogen
atmosphere develops magnetic properties approximately 50 percent
as effective as those attained in a hydrogen atmosphere.
7-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.3.6
Finish
After annealing (where required), and prior to final assembly, the parts requiring painting shall
be given one coat of pretreatment primer and two coats of enamel. In some cases a cadmium-plated
finish may be required for the enclosure and cover assemblies.
7.3.6.1
Finish at Enclosure-Cover Interface
The mating surfaces of the enclosure and its cover which come in contact with the EMI gasket
shall be cleaned to the bare metal, be free of all foreign materials, and remain unpainted to ensure a
metal-to-metal seal to prevent leakage of magnetic flux.
Each time thereafter that the enclosure is opened, the contact surfaces should be inspected
and, if necessary, cleaned to the bare metal before reattaching the cover.
If the enclosure is located in a corrosive environment, the contact surfaces between the
enclosure and its cover shall be protected with a conductive finish, such as cadmium plating, or other
conductive coating.
7.4
RECOMMENDED WIRING PRACTICES FOR USE IN SHIELDING ENCLOSURES
In order to optimize the EMI protection provided by shielding enclosures, particular attention
should be paid to the layout of wiring inside the enclosures. The size of the loop area formed by a pair
of conductors should be kept to a minimum by twisting the pair and by maintaining the twist as close
to the terminals as practicable. In addition, the spacing between radiators and susceptors within the
enclosure should be maintained as a minimum in accordance with section 6 wherever practicable.
Figures 7-3, 7-4, and 7-5 illustrate various wiring practices.
The wiring practice shown in figure 7-3a is not recommended because it creates an
unnecessarily large pickup loop area (shaded area) which increases circuit susceptibility. Figure 7-3b
shows the recommended practice of keeping the conductor pairs short and tightly twisted to minimize
the pickup loop area.
The wiring practice shown in figure 7-4a is not recommended because of the increase in
cross-coupling caused by running susceptible (low-level) conductors too close to radiating (high-level)
conductors. Figure 7-4b shows the recommended practice for obtaining maximum spacing (see
section 6 for required spacing) between susceptible conductors and radiating conductors.
The wiring practice shown in figure 7-5a for a cable having shielded twisted pairs is not
recommended because the arrangement creates large pickup loop areas. Figure 7-5b shows the
recommended practice for terminating the shielded twisted pairs. The practice shown in figure 7-5b
allows the shield for each twisted pair to be brought close to the terminals. A general rule for good
wiring practice for shielded twisted pairs is to bring the shield as close as practicable to the end of the
twisted pair and maintain the twist between pairs as close to the terminals as practicable.
7-16
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 7-3.
Wiring Practice for Minimizing Pickup Loop Areas
Inside Shielding Enclosure
7-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 7-4.
7-18
Wiring Practice for Minimizing Spacing Between
Conductors Inside Shielding Enclosure
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 7-5.
Wiring Practice for Shielded Twisted Pairs
Inside Shielding Enclosure
7-19
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.5
METHOD FOR PLUGGING HOLE IN STEEL ENCLOSURE
Figure 7-6 illustrates a recommended method for plugging a hole in a steel enclosure when
welding is not practicable. The gasket provides an environmental seal for the enclosure, and the
retainer maintains the shielding integrity of the enclosure.
7.6
TERMINATIONS AT HULL FITTINGS
The following paragraphs describe the shielding hardware required to terminate flexible
conduit at the inboard end of pressure proof hull fittings.
7.6.1
90-Degree Capped Elbow Termination
Figure 7-7 shows the components required for a 90-degree capped elbow termination at a hull
fitting. The hull fittings is this figure are the type specified in MIL-C-24231 and are used to complete
the path of multiconductor cables through the submarine pressure hull. Most of these hull fittings are
supplied with 15-foot lengths of type B-16 wires (MIL-W-16878/1) attached to each hull fitting terminal.
The B-16 wires are fed through the cap portion of the elbow. The conductors of the shielded cable
are also run through the cap portion and connected to the B-16 wires. Once these conductors are
joined they are stuffed in the elbow and the cap is screwed in place. Table I in figure 7-7 lists typical
combinations of components required for the hull fittings used.
7.6.2
Two-Branch Assembly Termination
Figure 7-8 shows an assembly which can be used to shield and split the conductors
associated with hull fitting symbol No. 516 into two branches in opposite directions. Electromagnetic
shielding is maintained inside the assembly where the inboard conductors of the hull fitting are
connected to the conductors of the shielded cables.
7.6.3
Three-Branch Assembly Termination
Figure 7-9 shows an assembly which can be used to shield and split the conductors
associated with hull fitting symbol No. 516 into three branches. Electromagnetic shielding is
maintained inside the assembly where the inboard conductors of the hull fitting are connected to the
conductors of the shielded cables.
7.6.4
Tailpiece for Hull-Fitting Termination
Figure 7-10 shows a tailpiece used for terminating a 90-degree elbow, a two-branch
assembly, or a three-branch assembly to a hull-fitting gland nut.
7.6.5
MX-7637/U Stuffing Tube Termination Adapter
The MX-7637/U stuffing tube is a pressure proof fitting which has been designed to pass an
RG-293/U cable through the submarine pressure hull. The nut clamp of the MX-7637/U must be
replaced by an adapter, figure 7-11, which couples the stuffing tube to a 3/4-inch flexible metal
conduit. The end of the conduit which attaches to the adapter is terminated in a GR2129 ferrule and
coupling nut of figure 4-11 (section 4).
7-20
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. THIS METHOD SHALL BE USED ONLY WHEN IT IS NOT PRACTICABLE TO PLUG A HOLE BY WELDING.
2. REMOVE ALL PAINT, ANODIC FILM, GREASE, ETC. FROM INSIDE SURFACE OF ENCLOSURE AROUND
AREA OF HOLE IN ORDER TO OBTAIN GOOD METAL-TO-METAL CONTACT WITH PC 3.
3. PC 2 AND PC 4 MAY BE WELDED OR BRAZED TOGETHER, OR FABRICATED FROM ONE PIECE OF
LOW-CARBON STEEL.
4. FINISH SIMILAR TO ORIGINAL ENCLOSURE.
5. DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 7-6. Hole Plug for Steel Enclosure
Reprinted without change
7-21
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. THE COMBINATION OF AN RP2100 END-FITTING AND AN RP2411, RP2430, OR RP2431 ADAPTER MAY
BE USED AS AN OPTIONAL METHOD OF TERMINATING THE CONDUIT.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 7-7. Components for 90-Degree Capped Elbow Termination
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-22
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. THE COMBINATION OF AN RP2100 END-FITTING AND AN RP2430 ADAPTER MAY BE USED AS AN
OPTIONAL METHOD OF TERMINATING THE CONDUIT.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 7-8. Components for Two-Branch Assembly Termination
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-23
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. THE COMBINATION OF AN RP2100 END-FITTING AND AN RP2430 ADAPTER MAY BE USED AS AN
OPTIONAL METHOD OF TERMINATING THE CONDUIT.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 7-9. Components for Three-Branch Assembly Termination
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-24
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. MATERIAL: LOW CARBON STEEL IN ACCORDANCE WITH FED-STD-66 WITH CADMIUM PLATING IN
ACCORDANCE WITH QQ-P-416, TYPE I, CL3.
2. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES.
Figure 7-10. Tailpiece for Hull-Fitting Termination
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-25
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
NOTES:
1. REMOVE ALL SHARP EDGES.
2. NAVAL BRASS QQ-B-637.
Figure 7-11. Adapter for Stuffing-Tube Type MX-7637/U
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
7-26
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
7.7
REQUIREMENTS FOR THE USE OF ALUMINUM OR STEEL CONNECTORS AND
ACCESSORIES
To maintain the EMC protection obtained by a susceptible cable enclosed in a flexible
shielding conduit, certain spacing requirements should be met before the use of aluminum connectors
and its rear accessories (such as backshells) are considered. The requirements which allow the use
of aluminum or dictate the use of low-carbon steel connectors and accessories are as follows:
Where the section 6 spacing requirements for an unshielded susceptible cable operating at
frequencies below 100 kHz (i.e., section 6 cable categories S1, S2, S4, R5, R6, and R7) are met, an
aluminum connector and its accessories may be used. (See figure 7-12a.)
Where the section 6 spacing requirements for the unshielded susceptible cable operating at
frequencies below 100 kHz cannot be met, a low-carbon steel connector and its accessories should
be used. (See figure 7-12b.)
It should be noted that connectors and backshells made of low-carbon steel are not readily
available and may require a long delivery time. It should also be noted that some GR2000 series and
RP2000 series adapters can be attached directly to connectors in place of backshells. Thus, in many
cases, these adapters, which are made of low-carbon steel, can eliminate the need for a backshell
(whether aluminum or steel).
7.8
BONDING AND GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
Electronic equipment, equipment enclosures, shielding enclosures, and associated conduit
shall be bonded to ground potential (ship's hull) as specified in MIL-STD-1310. See the paragraphs
under GENERAL REQUIREMENTS and DETAILED REQUIREMENTS dealing with EMI reduction.
For conduit grounding, see the paragraph on submarines.
7-27
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Figure 7-12.
7-28
Spacing Requirements of Section 6 for Aluminum or
Steel Connectors and Backshells
APPENDIX A
SEPARATION AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS OF SECTION 5 OF
NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX A
SEPARATION AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS OF
SECTION 5 OF NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
A-1
Page
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... A-1
Paragraph (Section 5 Numbers)
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-3-1
5-3-2
5-3-3
5-3-4
5-3-5
BACKGROUND .........................................................................................................
SCOPE ......................................................................................................................
CABLE SHIELDING, MARKING, AND SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS ................
Cable Marking ............................................................................................................
Cable Shielding and Separation Chart .......................................................................
Exceptions to Requirements for SLL Cables .............................................................
General Cable Separation Requirements ..................................................................
Dual Purpose Cables .................................................................................................
A-2
A-2
A-3
A-3
A-3
A-5
A-6
A-6
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure (Section 5 Number)
5-1
Page
Cable Chart Showing Separation and Shielding
Requirements for Different Cable Categories ............................................................ A-4
A-i/A-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX A
SEPARATION AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS OF
SECTION 5 OF NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010
A-1
INTRODUCTION
The cable separation and shielding requirements of section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 are
presented in this appendix for reference purposes and, specifically, as background information for utilizing
appendix B of this handbook. Appendix B contains guidelines that deal with interface situations in which
more than one set of cable spacing and shielding requirements are implemented on the same platform.
For example, it addresses the requirements of section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 and the
requirements of section 6 of either NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 or S9407-AB-HBK-010 (including
Revision 1).
The remaining pages of section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 are not included in this appendix
because they concern hardware, such as the GR2000 series conduit fittings and hull fittings, which are
described in other sections of this handbook.
A-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
SECTION 5
FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND GENERAL GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS
5-1
BACKGROUND
As communications, sonar and other electronics systems on board submarines are improved
through advancing technology, the systems generally become more complex, with higher power levels
being generated - and radiated - from various circuits. Concurrently, more susceptible to electromagnetic
interferences. Shielding techniques must improve in order that present and future equipments shall
operate at their designed capabilities and not be degraded by the electromagnetic environment.
Until the present, cables on submarines have been shielded with seamless steel pipe made from
low carbon steel and, where flexibility was required, Anaconda type AT2198 flexible metal conduit. These
materials, and complete details for their application are described in sections 1 through 4 of this handbook
A material at greatly improved shielding capability (at low field intensities) over low carbon steel is
an iron alloy containing a high percentage of nickel. It has a high initial magnetic permeability, a desirable
characteristic for shielding against radiated magnetic fields of low intensity. A number of manufacturers
are now fabricating flexible conduit from this high permeability material, and this is the type of conduit
which the Navy Underwater Sound Laboratory has tested, and which the Naval Ship Engineering Center
(NAVSEC) has approved for use on new construction submarines.
5-2
SCOPE
This section applies to new submarine design and construction. It provides:
a. Cable shielding and separation requirements
b. Bonding and grounding procedures
c. Details of use of transition fittings to connect flexible conduit to various hull fitting and bulkhead
fittings
d. Specifications for flexible metal conduit, with a listing of qualified suppliers and their approved
sizes and types of conduit. (See appendix 1)
e. Specifications for transition and accessory fittings, with a listing of drawings of such fittings and
sources of supply. (See appendix 2)
5-3
CABLE SHIELDING, MARKING, AND SEPARATION REQUIREMENTS
5-3-1 Cable Marking
Cable identification tags shall be attached to all cables to indicate the appropriate cable category
designation and these cables shall be enclosed in electromagnetic shielding or separate in accordance
with the requirements specified in this section. Separation distance specified shall be measured between
the outer sheathes of the cables or between the external electromagnetic shields. Cables enclosed in
flexible metal conduit shall be identified by using the standard electronic cable designator including the
shielded cable category mark on the conduit surrounding the cable.
EXAMPLES: 3R-RA28, RG-264/U (XLL)
R-SL57, 2SA-8 (SLL)
2R-SM5, RG-28 (LL)
A-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
5-3-2 Cable Shielding and Separation Chart
The chart in figure 5-1 specifies the requirement for shielding and separation of cables used for
submarine electronic systems installations. The chart legend defines the various symbols used.
To use the chart, determine the category of the cables for which shielding or separation information
is required. As an example, it has been determined that two cables being installed in a cable run fall in the
LL and XLL category. To determine shielding requirements:
a. Enter the chart on the left at line F(LL), move to the right to column 4(XLL). The block at the
intersection of line F, column 4 is
b. Refer to the chart legend to interpret the meaning of this block.
c. The heavy circle surrounding the designator XLL specifies that the cable in the XLL category
must be shielded in high permeability flexible metal conduit. Since there are no lines or arrowheads
between the two cable category designators, the chart legend indicates that the two cables are compatible
and no addition shielding or separation is required.
As another example, consider two cables in the VHL and XLL category. To determine shielding
requirements:
a. Enter the chart on the left at line B(VHL), move to right to column 4(XLL).
b. Refer to the chart legend to interpret the meaning of this block.
c. The line between the two designators in the block indicates that the cables are not compatible
and both require shielding and separation.
d. The heavy circles surrounding each of the designators specify that both cables must be shielded
in high permeability flexible metal conduit.
e. The number 12 enclosed in a square indicates that besides the use of flexible conduit the two
cable runs enclosed in metal conduit must have a minimum separation of 12 inches.
A-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FIGURE 5-1. Cable Chart Showing Separation and Shielding Requirements for Different Cable
Categories
A-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
As a third example, consider two cables in the TIF and WLL categories. To determine shielding
requirements:
a. Enter the chart at the left at line E (TIF). Move to the right to column 6(WLL).
b. Refer to chart legend to interpret the meaning of this block.
c. The arrow pointing toward the thin circle surrounding the WLL category designator indicates
the WLL category cable shall be shielded in flexible metal conduit if the minimum separation of 12 inches,
specified in the lower right-hand corner cannot be maintained.
d. Also, the 12 in the lower right-hand corner, according to the legend, indicates that if the 12-inch
separation in the cable run can be maintained, no shielding is required for either cable.
5-3-3 Exceptions to Requirements for SLL Cables
a. Installation of AN/BQS-6B, AN/BQS-13 sonar receiving cables below 100 kHz (SLL) and sonar
projector transmitting cables (SHL) in the same cableway is permitted without shielding or separation
provided:
(1) No other system sonar projector transmitting cables (SHL) are located within the
cableway throughout the entire run.
(2) The AN/BQS-6B and AN/BQS-13 cableways are located at least 6 inches from all other
passive electrical devices and 18 inches from all other sonar projector transmitting cables (SHL)
throughout the entire run between the elliptical bulkhead and the equipment cabinet in the EES space.
(3) Separation between preamplifier input cables and the transmitting cables located within
the sphere shall be at least 6 inches or installed in approved shielding.
b. Installation of sonar projector transmitting cables (SHL) in shielding (vice sonar receiving
cables below 100 kHz (SLL) is permitted in the reactor compartment.
c. A minimum separation distance of two inches shall be maintained between PASSIVE cables
and SLL shielded cables.
d. The following requirements apply to the separation of shielded or unshielded SLL category
cables where these cables enter equipment enclosures:
(1) Separation for cable point-of-entrance locations shall be as much as stuffing tube plate or
other dimensions, terminal board locations, and interior or exterior space limitations allow.
(2) Separation will not be required for point of entrance into equipment providing all of the
other active or passive cables which would violate the separation requirement are entering the same
equipment.
5-3-4
General Cable Separation Requirements
These general cable separation requirements apply to those cables not specifically covered in the
cable chart. Separation distance specified shall be measured between the outer sheaths of the cable or
between the external shields.
A-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
a. The separation specified between LL and PASSIVE, XLL and PASSIVE, and SLL and
PASSIVE shall be maintained between the SLL, XLL, LL category cables, and other interference sources.
Examples of other interference sources are separately mounted transformers, fluorescent light fixtures,
power supplies, power panels, motors generators, controllers, and electronic transmitters.
b. If it is not feasible to maintain minimum separation of cables in the LL and SLL category in any
portion of a cable run within a watertight compartment, the entire cable shall be shielded.
5-3-5
Dual Purpose Cables
Cables serving a dual purpose (transmitting and receiving) shall be identified with both categories.
For example, cables between sonar transducers and terminal equipment may function as both
transmitting cable and a receiver cable. Such a cable should be marked with appropriate shielding
category designators such as SHL/SLL. An rf cable between a communication transceiver and the
associated antenna could be marked RHL/LL.
The shielding and/or separation requirement for a dual purpose cable shall be in accordance with
the methods outlined in the cable chart for the category of cable requiring the greater separation or the
better shielding.
A-6
APPENDIX B
GUIDELINES FOR SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT
AN INTERFACE
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX B
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT AN INTERFACE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
B-1
B-2
B-3
B-3.1
B-3.2
B-3.3
B-3.4
B-4
B-4.1
B-4.2
B-5
B-5.1
B-5.2
Page
INTRODUCTION B-1..................................................................................................
SCOPE B-1.................................................................................................................
GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR DEVELOPING INTERFACE CABLE SPACING ......
AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS B-1 ...................................................................
Develop Functional Equivalence ............................................................................
Recategorize Interfacing System Cables ...............................................................
Generate Cable Spacing Matrix .............................................................................
Resolve Prohibitive Cable Spacing Requirements .....................................................
SECTION 5 and SECTION 6 CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING
INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................
Section 5 Versus Section 6 Functional Equivalence ..............................................
Section 5 Versus Section 6 Interface Spacing and
Shielding Requirements Matrix ..............................................................................
CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT THE
INTERFACE OF CCS (SECTION 6) AND SWS .......................................................
Section 6 Versus SWS Functional Equivalence ....................................................
CCS Versus SWS Interface Spacing and Shielding
Requirements Matrix ..............................................................................................
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-1
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
B-2
LIST OF TABLES
Table
B-1
B-2
B-3
Page
Section 5 Versus Section 6 Functional Equivalence .................................................. B-3
Section 5 Versus Section 6 Cable Spacing/Shielding
Requirements ............................................................................................................. B-4
CCS/SWS Cable Interface Spacing/Shielding Requirements
Matrix (Rev A) ............................................................................................................ B-5
B-i/B-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX B
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT AN INTERFACE
B-1 INTRODUCTION
In situations where more than one set of cable spacing and shielding requirements are
implemented on the same platform, a compatible set of joint requirements must be developed and applied
at the common interface. This section provides two examples of interface requirements that have been
developed and implemented on submarine platforms.
B-2 SCOPE
Spacing and shielding requirements provided in this section apply only at the following designated
interfaces:
a.
Cable installations in accordance with section 5 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 and section 6
of either NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 or S9407-AB-HBK-010 (including Revision 1).
b.
The Command and Control System (CCS) installed in accordance with section 6 of either
NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 or S9407-AB-HBK-010 (including Revision 1), and the Strategic Weapons
System (SWS) installed in accordance with SWS Coordinated Drawing 3191445.
The procedure employed to develop these requirements illustrates a general approach that can be used
to establish adequate spacing and shielding at a given interface.
B-3 GENERAL PROCEDURE FOR DEVELOPING INTERFACE CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING
REQUIREMENTS
In applying the cable spacing and shielding requirements given in section 6 at an interface, all the
requirements imposed on both systems must be observed. This includes bonding and grounding
practices as well as cable spacing requirements. Paragraphs B-3.1 through B-3.4 describe a general
procedure that can be used to develop cable spacing and shielding requirements at an interface.
B-3.1 Develop Functional Equivalence
Developing a functional equivalence between section 6 cable categories and those of the
interfacing system requires detailed information regarding the latter. Much of this can be obtained from
technical manuals, equipment design specifications, and installation requirements.
B-3.2 Recategorize Interfacing System Cables
Using equivalent cable category information, recategorize the interfacing system cables in terms of
the section 6 cable designators. If all cable designator information is not available, the category may be
assigned and the group numbers determined later.
B-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
B-3.3 Generate Cable Spacing Matrix
The interface cable spacing matrix compares the section 6 cable categories to the interface cable
categories. Cable spacing is specified at matrix coordinates when the cable designator can be fully
described. When this is not the case, the procedures of section 6 must be used to determine the spacing.
B-3.4 Resolve Prohibitive Cable Spacing Requirements
Interface cable spacing may become prohibitive where the requirements of both systems must be
satisfied. In these cases, tradeoffs may be necessary to resolve problems. It should be noted that this
approach may lead to greater overall cable spacing than that required by either system when installed
separately.
B-4 SECTION 5 AND SECTION 6 CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS
B-4.1 Section 5 Versus Section 6 Functional Equivalence
A review of the development of section's 5 and 6 shows that their spacing requirements do not
correspond quantitatively. Section 6 spacing requirements were developed using mathematical analyses
and validation testing and can be numerically defined - - this was not the case with section 5
requirements. To develop a numerical relationship between these sections, the section 5 cables are
recategorized using section 6 criteria. This establishes the functional equivalence between cable
categories presented in table B-1.
B-4.2 Section 5 Versus Section 6 Interface Spacing and Shielding Requirements Matrix
Employing the functional equivalence concept of paragraph B-3.1 and section 6 cable category
spacings, joint interface spacing requirements were developed. The cable interface spacing/shielding
requirements matrix is presented in table B-2. It should be noted that the cable spacings given in the
matrix represent a worst case, i.e., the greatest spacing to ensure compatibility.
B-5 CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS AT THE INTERFACE OF CCS (SECTION 6)
AND SWS
B-5.1 Section 6 Versus SWS Functional Equivalence
The SWS cables were recategorized using section 6 criteria and observing the SWS definitions
and requirements given in SWS Coordination Drawing 3191445, Rev F. A functional equivalence was
established as a result of this effort.
B-5.2 CCS Versus SWS Interface Spacing and Shielding Requirements Matrix
As in the case of the section 5 versus section 6 matrix (table B-2), a similar set of requirements for
CCS versus SWS was developed. This spacing and shielding matrix is presented in table B-3.
B-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table B-1. Section 5 Versus Section 6 Functional Equivalence
Section 5 Category
Function
Section 6 Category
VHL
Radar, Radio, and Sonar Transmission
SHL
Sonar Transmission
R3
RHL
Radio Transmission
R4
Radio, and Sonar Reception Above 100 kHz
S3
LL
XLL*
Radio, and Navigation Reception Below 100 kHz
SLL
Sonar Reception Below 100 kHz
TIF
Radar/IFF Transceiver
R3, R4
S1, S2
S4
R4/S3
WLL
Data Transmission
R5, R6, R7, R8
WLX
Missile Function and Guidance Power
R5, R6, R7, R9
Passive
Power Plus Miscellaneous
R1, R2, R9
* This cable shielded in high permeability flexible metal conduit without exception.
B-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table B-2. Section 5 Versus Section 6 Cable Spacing/Shielding Requirements
SECTION 5 CABLE CATEGORIES
RHL
LL
WLL
*XLL
WLX
SHL
PAS
SLL
TIF
VHL
R1
1
2
1
1
0
0
2
1
R2
1
2
2
2
0
0
2
1
1
1
1
Note
1
Note
1
6
2
1
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
R3
1
2
1
Note
1
Note
1
5
R4
0
2
1
2
1
1
1
3
2
1
6
R5
1
2
1
1
0
1
1
3
2
1
C
A
B
L
E
R6
1
2
1
2
0
1
2
7
2
1
R7
1
2
1
4
0
1
2
2
1
R8
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
Note
1
3
2
1
C
A
T
E
G
O
R
I
E
S
R9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S1
2
0
0
7
0
0
Note
1
Note
1
2
2
Note
1
7
7
S2
Note
1
7
Note
1
0
0
2
6
S3
2
0
2
0
2
2
0
2
2
S4
3
0
Note
1
0
Note
1
6
0
3
6
6
Note
1
* This cable shielded in high permeability flexible metal conduit without exception.
NOTES:
1.
Employ procedures contained in section 6 to determine cable spacing requirement.
2.
Spacing requirements are in inches.
B-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table B-3. CCS/SWS Cable Interface Spacing/Shielding Requirements
Matrix (Rev A) (Sheet 1 of 2)
SWS CATEGORIY
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
R1
R2
PWR
RAD
0
0
0
Note 1
WLL
Note 1
SEN
2
2
2
2
2
2
0
2
2
2
0
2
Note 5
Note 5
0
2
2
0
R3
1
0
R4
1
1
R5
1
1
Note 2
LL
0
0
Note 2
XLL
Note 2
SHL
0
Note 2
H/L
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
6
C
A
B
L
E
C
A
T
E
G
O
R
I
E
S
R6
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
R7
2
2
1
1
0
0
0
0
R8
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
R9
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S1
Note 3
0
0
0
0
0
0
S3
Note 4
2
Note 3
Note 4
14
Note 4
14
Note 4
2
Note 4
14
0
Note 3
Note 4
14
Note 4
14
Note 4
2
Note 4
14
0
S2
Note 4
14
Note 4
14
Note 4
2
Note 4
14
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
S4
NOTES:
A.
Cables spacing values shown in the table are given in inches and are measured between the
closest points of the outer sheath or shielding of the individual cables or bundles of cables.
B.
The symbol enclosing a spacing value in the table is from SWS Coordination Drawing 3191445,
applies to the SWS cable, and is defined as follows:
= Minimum spacing allowed, without exception.
B-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table B-3. CCS/SWS Cable Interface Spacing/Shielding Requirements
Matrix (Rev A) (Sheet 2 of 2)
MATRIX NOTES:
1.
Shield this cable in electrostatic sheath or armor, from equipment enclosure or penetration "A" to
equipment enclosure or penetration "B."
2.
Shield this entire cable with high permeability flexible metal conduit (on inboard routings).
3.
To determine spacing, identify worst case power cable in terms of section 6 category R1 or R2,
figure 6-1, and use the section 6 spacing/shielding requirements.
4.
Where the indicated spacing cannot be achieved, determine the equivalent section 6 category for
the SWS cable, using specific cable and functional data to be supplied by SSPO upon NAVSEA request.
Use the section 6 spacing/shielding requirements to determine the minimum spacing with shielding.
5.
Minimum spacing is 2 inches, except that WLL and SEN categories may be routed with zero
spacing from sound powered telephone cables categorized R5. (Sound powered telephone cables
categorized R5 have the following lead number prefixes: C-2JV, C-EM, C-1SJ, C-SJ, C-X1J, C-8JP, CJA, C-10JC, C-X43J, C-2JX, C-1MJ, C-X6J, and C-E.)
B-6
APPENDIX C
QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST FOR FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
AND FITTINGS
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX C
QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST FOR
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
C-1
C-2
C-3
Page
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................... C-1
BACKGROUND ......................................................................................................... C-1
PROCUREMENT OF NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 HARDWARE
AND/OR S9407-AB-HBK-010 HARDWARE .............................................................. C-1
LIST OF TABLES
Table
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
Page
Manufacturer Codes ..................................................................................................
Flexible Shielding Conduit ..........................................................................................
GR2000-Series Fittings for Flexible Conduit
(Braze-On Type) ........................................................................................................
RP2000-Series Fittings for Flexible Conduit
(Reusable Type) ........................................................................................................
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-i/C-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX C
QUALIFIED PRODUCTS LIST FOR
FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT AND FITTINGS
C-1
INTRODUCTION
The following is a list of qualified vendors of flexible shielding conduit specified in appendix D,
GR2000-series fittings specified in section 4, and RP2000-series fittings specified in section 5 of this
handbook.
Questions or comments concerning this list should be directed to: Commander, Naval Sea
Systems Command, Code 05H3, Washington, DC 20375, phone (202) 791-3140, or other NAVSEAdesignated authority.
C-2
BACKGROUND
A requirement still exists for shielding hardware as described in NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010
"Handbook of Shipboard Electromagnetic Shielding Practices," the publication which preceded this
S9407-AB-HBK-010 document. The basic difference between the shielding hardware specified in the two
documents is as follows:
C-3
a.
NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 did not standardize the outside diameters of each of the sizes
of flexible shielding conduit. As a result, the outside diameters varied with each vendor, and
it was necessary to purchase the associated fittings from the same vendor in order to
ensure dimensional compatibility. Also, an olive-drab finish over the electroless-nickel plate
on the fittings was specified.
b.
The S9407-AB-HBK-010 document standardizes the outside diameters of each of the sizes
of flexible shielding conduit, and sizes the associated fittings to fit this standardized conduit.
Also, the requirement for an olive-drab finish over the electroless-nickel plate is deleted for
the reasons that the olive-drab finish is not a critical requirement for adequate corrosion
protection for below-decks applications, and also as a visual means of differentiating
between the new and the old fittings.
PROCUREMENT OF NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 HARDWARE AND/OR S9407-AB-HBK-010
HARDWARE
The following policies of the four qualified vendors regarding procurement of hardware described
in either the NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010 (Document (a)) or S9407-AB-HBK-010 (Document (b)) are
listed below:
a.
DCX-CHOL Enterprises, formerly Breeze-Illinois, Inc. (BI), will supply flexible shielding
conduit only to Document (b) because they have standardized their tooling to Document (b).
However, they will supply associated fittings according to either Documents (a) or (b) based
on a clear indication as to which type is required.
b.
Flexible Metal Hose Mfg Co. (FMH) will associated fittings to either Documents (a) or (b)
provided that the purchase order clearly states whether the 0967-LP-283-5010 or the
S9407-AB-HBK-010 hardware is required.
c.
Elliott Manufacturing, formerly ServicAir Company (S), will supply flexible shielding conduit
and associated fittings as stated in b above.
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
C-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
d.
Glenair, Inc. (G) will supply flexible shielding conduit and associated fittings to either
Documents (a) or (b) provided that the purchase order clearly states whether the 0967-LP283-5010 or the S9407-AB-HBK-010 hardware is required.
If no indication is given by the purchaser as to which document applies, the vendors will normally
send hardware according to S9407-AB-HBK-010. The purchaser should contact the individual vendors
for specific details and any exceptions to the above statements. A typical exception may be the use of
low-carbon steel for the RP2000-series conduit couplings, in accordance with Document (b), instead of
Hipernom, in accordance with Document (a). This substitution is cost effective and acceptable by
NAVSEA.
Table C-1. Manufacturer Codes
Mfr's Code
BI
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
C-2
Manufacturer
DCX-CHOL Enterprises Inc., Elecsys Division
225 Enterprise Drive
Pekin, IL 61554
PHONE: (309) 353-4455
FMH
FMH Corporation
345 Fisher Ave.
Costa Mesa, CA 92626
PHONE: (714) 751-1000
G
Glenair, Inc.
1211 Air Way
Glendale, CA 91201-2497
PHONE: (818) 247-6000
S
Elliott Manufacturing
PO BOX 773
Binghamton, NY 13902
PHONE: (607) 772-0404
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-2. Flexible Shielding Conduit
TYPE 1 (NONJACKETED) CONDUIT
TYPE 2 (JACKETED) CONDUIT
Conduit
Navy
Mfr
Mfr
EST
Navy Part
Mfr
Mfr
Size
Part
Code*
Part
wt/ft
No.
Code*
Part
wt/ft
(nom ID)
No.
No.
(lbs)
No.
(lbs)
1/4
EMO2
3/8
1/2
5/8
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
EM03
EM04
EM05
EM06
EM08
EM10
EM12
EM16
2-1/2
EM20
3
EM24
BI
023700-HP0250
0.11
BI
023700-HE0250
S
SM83-02
0.102
S
SM83-02N
0.1895
G
750-084-08
0.105
G
750-085-08
0.195
BI
023700-HP0375
0.16
BI
023700-HP0375
0.24
S
SM83-03
0.153
S
SM83-03N
0.2499
G
750-084-12
0.155
G
750-085-12
0.255
BI
023700-HP0500
0.20
BI
023700-HP0500
0.30
S
SM83-04
0.208
S
SM83-04N
0.330
G
750-084-16
0.210
G
750-085-16
0.340
BI
023700-HP0625
0.24
BI
023700-HP0625
0.39
S
SM83-05
0.252
S
SM83-05N
0.380
G
750-084-20
0.260
G
750-085-20
0.390
BI
023700-HP0750
0.34
BI
023700-HP0750
0.54
S
SM83-06
0.308
S
SM83-06N
0.444
G
750-084-24
0.310
G
750-085-24
0.450
BI
023700-HP1000
0.46
BI
023700-HP1000
0.68
S
SM83-08
0.514
S
SM83-08N
0.753
G
750-084-32
0.520
G
750-085-32
0.760
BI
023700-HP1250
0.56
BI
023700-HP1250
0.80
S
SM83-10
0.628
S
SM83-10N
0.853
G
750-084-40
0.630
G
750-085-40
0.860
BI
023700-HP1500
0.69
BI
023700-HP1500
0.89
S
SM83-12
0.746
S
SM83-12N
1.002
G
750-084-48
0.750
G
750-085-48
1.050
1.498
S
SM83-16
1.133
G
750-084-64
1.140
S
SM83-20
1.408
G
750-084-80
1.410
S
SM83-24
1.680
G
750-084-96
1.690
EMO2R
EST
EM03R
EM04R
EM05R
EM06R
EM08R
EM10R
EM12R
EM16R
EM20R
EM24R
0.17
S
SM83-16N
G
750-085-64
1.500
S
SM83-20N
1.7794
G
750-085-80
1.7900
S
SM83-24N
2.0609
G
750-085-96
2.0900
* See Table C-1.
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
C-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-3.
GR2000-SERIES
GR2000-Series Fittings for Flexible
Conduit (Braze-on Type)
Fig.
No.
Basic Part
No.
Trans Technology
Electronics
Part No.
4-1
GR2120
222837-FE5100
4-2
GR2121
222838-FE5100
4-3
GR2122
(Style A)
4-4
Flexible Metal
Hose Co.
Basic Part No.
G&H Technology
Glenair, Inc.
Basic Part No.
Basic Part No.
7000-511
S72120
GR2120
71315
S72121
GR2121
222839-FE5100
7000-508
S72122
GR2122 (Style A)
GR2122
(Style B)
222840-FE5100
71316
S72122B
GR2122 (Style B)
4-5
GR2123
222841-FE5100
7000-507
S72123
GR2123
4-6
GR2124
222842-FE5100
7000-511
S72124
GR2124
4-7
GR2125
222843-FE5100
7000-511
S72125
GR2125
4-8
GR2126
222844-FE5100
7000-600
S72126
GR2126
4-9
GR2127
222845-FE5100
7000-372
S72127
GR2127
4-10
GR2128
222846-FE5100
7000-421
S72128
GR2128
4-11
GR2129
222847-FE5100
7000-655
S72129
GR2129
NOTES:
1.
The GR2120, GR2123, GR2124, and GR2125 transition fittings must be obtained only from the qualified
sources listed above. The other GR2000-Series fittings may be obtained from any source which
manufacturers them in accordance with section 4 of this handbook.
2.
The manufacturer's part number development for any particular fitting size may be obtained from the individual
manufacturers or their representatives.
Reprinted without change
C-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-4.
RP2000-SERIES
RP2000-Series Fittings for
Flexible Conduit (Reusable Type)
(Sheet 1 of 4)
Fig.
No.
Basic Part
No.
Trans Technology
Electronics
Part No.
Flexible Metal
Hose Co.
Basic Part No.
G&H Technology
Glenair, Inc.
Basic Part No.
Basic Part No.
5-1
RP2100
See sheets 2, 3 and
7000-718
S82100
RP2100
5-2
RP2110
4 for part numbers
7000-869
S82110
RP2110
5-3
RP2120
71052
S82120
RP2120
5-4
RP2130
70977
S82130
RP2130
5-5
RP2140
71050
S82140
RP2140
5-6
RP2141
71317
S82141
RP2141
5-7
RP2200
7000-690
S82200
RP2200
5-8
RP2210
70978
S82210
RP2210
5-9
RP2311
71003
S82311
RP2311
5-10
RP2321
7000-716
S82321
RP2321
5-11
RP2330
7000-715
S82330
RP2330
5-12
RP2340
71048
S82340
RP2340
5-13
RP2350
71083
S82350
RP2350
5-14
RP2360
71319
S82360
RP2360
5-15
RP2400
7000-714
S82400
RP2400
5-16
RP2411
71323
S82411
RP2411
5-17
RP2420
71047
S82420
RP2420
5-18
RP2430
70979
S82430
RP2430
5-19
RP2431
71318
S82431
RP2431
5-20
RP2440
71091
S82440
RP2440
5-21
RP2500
7000-717
S82500
RP2500
5-22
RP2610
71054
S82610
RP2610
5-23
RP2620
71085
S82620
RP2620
NOTES:
1.
The RP2100- and RP2200-Series fittings must be obtained only from the qualified sources listed above.
Since the RP2300- through RP2600-Series adapters are simple threaded fittings, they may be obtained from
any source that manufactures them in accordance with section 5 of this handbook.
2.
The manufacturer's part number development for any particular fitting size may be obtained from the
individual manufacturers or their representative.
C-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-4.
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2100-EM03-S
RP2100-EM03-T
RP2100-EM05-S
RP2100-EM06-S
RP2100-EM06-T
RP2100-EM08-S
RP2100-EM08-T
RP2100-EM10-S
RP2100-EM12-T
RP2100-EM16-T
RP2110-EM02-S
RP2110-EM02-T
RP2110-EM03-S
RP2110-EM03-T
RP2110-EM04-S
RP2110-EM04-T
RP2110-EM05-S
RP2110-EM05-T
RP2110-EM06-S
RP2100-EM06-T
RP2100-EM08-S
RP2110-EM08-T
RP2110-EM10-S
RP2110-EM10-T
RP2110-EM12-S
RP2110-EM12-T
RP2100-EM16-S
RP2110-EM16-T
RP2120-EM02-S
RP2120-EM02-T
RP2120-EM03-S
RP2120-EM03-T
RP2120-EM04-S
RP2120-EM04-T
RP2120-EM05-S
RP2120-EM05-T
RP2120-EM06-S
RP2120-EM06-T
RP2120-EM08-S
RP2120-EM08-T
RP2120-EM10-S
RP2120-EM10-T
RP2120-EM12-S
RP2120-EM12-T
C-6
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
200701-FE5103
200702-FE5103
200701-FB5105
200701-FE5106
200702-FE5106
200701-FE5108
200702-FE5108
200701-FE5110
200702-FE5112
200702-FE5116
220725-FE5100
220737-FE5100
220726-FE5100
220738-FE5100
220727-FE5100
220739-FE5100
220728-FE5100
220740-FE5100
220729-FE5100
220741-FE5100
220730-FE5100
220742-FE5100
220731-FE5100
220743-FE5100
220732-FE5100
220744-FE5100
220733-FE5100
220745-FE5100
220671-FE5100
220711-FE5100
220672-FE5100
220712-FE5100
220673-FE5100
220713-FE5100
220674-FE5100
220714-FE5100
220675-FE5100
220715-FE5100
220676-FE5100
220716-FE5100
220677-FE5100
220717-FE5100
220678-FE5100
220718-FE5100
RP2000-Series Fittings for
Flexible Conduit (Reusable Type)
(Sheet 2 of 4)
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2120-EM16-S
RP2120-EM16-T
RP2130-EM03
RP2130-EM06
RP2130-EM08
RP2130-EM10
RP2140-EM02
RP2140-EM03
RP2140-EM04
RP2140-EM05
RP2140-EM06
RP2140-EM08
RP2140-EM10
RP2140-EM12
RP2140-EM16
RP2141-EM02
RP2141-EM03
RP2141-EM04
RP2141-EM05
RP2141-EM06
RP2141-EM08
RP2141-EM10
RP2141-EM12
RP2141-EM16
RP2200-EM05
RP2200-EM06
RP2200-EM08
RP2200-EM10
RP2200-EM12
RP2210-EM02
RP2210-EM03
RP2210-EM04
RP2210-EM06
RP2210-EM08
RP2210-EM08
RP2210-EM10
RP2210-EM12
RP2210-EM16
RP2210-EM20
RP2311-08-05-03
RP2311-09-05-01
RP2311-09-06-03
RP2311-10-06-02
RP2311-1.06-18-08-03
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
220679-FE5100
220719-FE5100
200731-FE5103
200731-FE5106
200731-FE5108
200731-FE5110
220847-FE5100
220848-FE5100
220849-FE5100
220850-FE5100
220851-FE5100
220852-FE5100
220853-FE5100
220854-FE5100
220855-FE5100
220966-FE5100
220967-FE5100
220968-FE5100
220969-FE5100
220970-FE5100
220971-FE5100
220972-FE5100
220973-FE5100
220974-FE5100
200747-FE5105
200747-FE5106
200747-FE5108
200747-FE5110
200747-FE5112
222384-FE5100
222385-FE5100
222386-FE5100
222387-FE5100
222388-FB5100
222388-FE5100
222389-FE5100
222390-FE5100
222391-FE5100
222392-FE5100
208572-FE5100
222335-FE5100
216866-FE5100
220566-FE5100
212501-FE5100
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-4.
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2311-1-08-H-010
RP2311-13-05-01
RP2311-13-06-01
RP2311-13-06-02
RP2311-13-08-01
RP2311-13-08-02
RP2311-14-08-02
RP2311-15-06-01
RP2311-15-10-02
RP2311-16-06-01
RP2311-16-08-01
RP2311-16-08-02
RP2311-16-10-01
RP2311-16-10-03
RP2311-17-06-01
RP2311-17-10-01
RP2311-18-06-01
RP2311-18-08-01
RP2311-18-10-01
RP2311-18-10-01
RP2311-18-10-02
RP2311-19-08-01
RP2311-19-08-01
RP2311-19-10-01
RP2311-21-10-01
RP2321-01-03
RP2321-03-06
RP2321-03-06
RP2330-04-03
RP2330-08-03
RP2330-08-04
RP2330-08-05
RP2330-08-06
RP2330-10-04
RP2330-10-06
RP2330-18-06-02
RP2340-13-06-03
RP2340-17-08-03
RP2340-19-06-01
RP2340-19-10-03
RP2340-21-08-01
RP2350-10-04-01
RP2350-14-03-02
RP2350-18-06-02
RP2350-28-06-02
RP2350-32-10-1
RP2000-Series Fittings for
Flexible Conduit (Reusable Type)
(Sheet 3 of 4)
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
208570-FE5100
222326-FE5100
222334-FE5100
216958-FE5100
222332-FE5100
222325-FE5100
222330-FE5100
216964-FE5100
216959-FE5100
222329-FE5100
222337-FE5100
213555-FE5100
208576-FE9300
222336-FE5100
216963-FE5100
220397-FE5100
216987-FE5100
222333-FE5100
212500-FE5100
212500-FK5300
208346-FE5100
208573-FE5100
208573-FK5300
208577-FE5100
222331-FE5100
222341-FE5100
212963-FE5100
212963-FK5300
220565-FE5100
213415-FE5100
212466-FX0000
216960-FE5100
216885-FE5100
212465-FE5100
216961-FE5100
208347-FE5100
222343-FE5100
213186-FE5100
222339-FE5100
222338-FE5100
222340-FE5100
208348-FE5100
220564-FE5100
220563-FE5100
220562-FE5100
216956-FE5100
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2350-36-12-02
RP2350-40-12-01
RP2350-40-12-02
RP2350-44-16-01
RP2350-44-16-02
RP2400-02-06
RP2400-02-08
RP2400-05-06
RP2400-05-08
RP2400-08-STN
RP2400-08-06
RP2400-08-08
RP2400-08-10
RP2400-15-16
RP2411-06-08
RP2411-07-06
RP2420-01-08
RP2420-04-08
RP2420-05-10
RP2440-03-N
RP2440-05-N
RP2440-06-N
RP2440-06-STN
RP2440-08-N
RP2440-12-N
RF2500-02
RP2500-03
RP2500-04
RP2500-05
RP2500-06
RP2500-08
RP2500-10
RP2500-12
RP2500-16
RP2610-02
RP2610-03
RP2610-04
RP2610-05
RP2610-06
RP2610-08
RP2610-10
RP2610-12
RP2610-16
RP2620-02
RP2620-03
RP2620-04
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
220539-FE5100
216951-FE5100
220538-FE5100
216952-FE5100
216953-FE5100
220395-FE5100
220393-FE5100
220394-FE5100
220396-FE5100
200871-FX0000
220388-FE5100
220390-FE5100
200871-FE5100
200875-FE5100
212507-FE5107
212508-FE5100
222269-FE5100
222346-FE5100
208568-FE5100
222567-FX0000
222345-FX0000
222244-FX0000
220385-FY0000
220518-FX0000
216955-FX0000
220632-FE5100
220633-FE5100
220634-FE5100
220635-FE5100
220636-FE5100
220637-FE5100
220638-FE5100
220639-FE5100
220640-FE5100
220643-FE5100
220644-FE5100
220645-FE5100
220646-FE5100
220647-FE5100
220648-FE5100
220649-FE5100
220650-FE5100
220651-FE5100
220613-FE5100
220614-FE5100
220615-FE5100
C-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table C-4.
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2620-05
RP2620-06
RP2620-08
RP2620-08
C-8
RP2000-Series Fittings for
Flexible Conduit (Reusable Type)
(Sheet 4 of 4)
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
220616-FE5100
220617-FE5100
220618-FE5100
208575-FE6600
Part Number
S9407-AB-HBK-010
RP2620-10
RP2620-10
RP2620-12
RP2620-16
Part Number
Trans Technology
Electronics
220619-FE5100
208578-FE6600
220620-FE5100
220621-FE5100
APPENDIX D
SPECIFICATION FOR FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX D
SPECIFICATION FOR FLEXIBLE SHIELDING CONDUIT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
1.
1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
2.
2.1
2.2
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.5.1
3.5.2
3.5.3
3.5.4
3.5.5
3.5.6
3.6
3.6.1
3.6.2
3.6.3
3.6.4
3.6.5
3.6.6
3.6.7
3.6.8
3.7
3.7.1
3.7.2
3.7.3
3.8
3.9
3.10
Page
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS ...........................................................................................
LIST OF TABLES ..........................................................................................................
FOREWORD ................................................................................................................
SCOPE ..........................................................................................................................
Scope.............................................................................................................................
Classification..................................................................................................................
Types .............................................................................................................................
Conduit part number ......................................................................................................
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.........................................................................................
Issues of documents......................................................................................................
Other publications ..........................................................................................................
REQUIREMENTS ..........................................................................................................
Classification of requirements........................................................................................
Qualification ...................................................................................................................
Quality conformance ......................................................................................................
Design and construction ................................................................................................
Materials ........................................................................................................................
Tubing material ..............................................................................................................
Annealing of tubing material ..........................................................................................
Seam interlock material .................................................................................................
Braid material.................................................................................................................
Jacket material...............................................................................................................
Heat-shrinkable tubing ...................................................................................................
Physical characteristics..................................................................................................
Sizes and dimensions ....................................................................................................
Lengths ..........................................................................................................................
Seams and joints ...........................................................................................................
Inner surfaces ................................................................................................................
Braid...............................................................................................................................
Rubber jacket.................................................................................................................
Splices ...........................................................................................................................
Ends...............................................................................................................................
Performance characteristics ..........................................................................................
Watertightness...............................................................................................................
Bend radius....................................................................................................................
Shielding effectiveness ..................................................................................................
Interchangeability...........................................................................................................
Marking ..........................................................................................................................
Manufacturer’s technical data ........................................................................................
D-iii
D-iii
D-iv
D-1
D-1
D-1
D-1
D-1
D-2
D-2
D-2
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-3
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-4
D-5
D-5
D-5
D-5
D-5
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
D-6
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-i
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Continued)
Paragraph
3.11
4.
4.1
4.1.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.4.1
4.4.2
4.4.3
4.4.4
4.5
4.5.1
4.6
4.6.1
4.6.2
4.6.3
4.6.4
4.6.5
4.6.6
4.6.7
4.7
4.8
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
6.
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
Page
Workmanship.................................................................................................................
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS.........................................................................
Responsibility for inspection ..........................................................................................
Test equipment and inspection facilities ........................................................................
Classification of inspections...........................................................................................
Materials inspection .......................................................................................................
Qualification inspection ..................................................................................................
Qualification test sample................................................................................................
Failures ..........................................................................................................................
Qualification of similar conduit .......................................................................................
Retention of qualification................................................................................................
Quality conformance inspection.....................................................................................
Production lot .................................................................................................................
Methods of inspection ....................................................................................................
Visual inspection ............................................................................................................
Dimensional inspection ..................................................................................................
Braid coverage...............................................................................................................
Tightness of covering.....................................................................................................
Watertightness...............................................................................................................
Bend radius....................................................................................................................
Shielding effectiveness ..................................................................................................
Test reports....................................................................................................................
Quality assurance ..........................................................................................................
PACKAGING..................................................................................................................
Cleaning.........................................................................................................................
Preservatives .................................................................................................................
Identification tags ...........................................................................................................
Unit packaging ...............................................................................................................
Wrapping .......................................................................................................................
Marking of shipping containers ......................................................................................
NOTES...........................................................................................................................
Intended use ..................................................................................................................
Type 1 conduit ...............................................................................................................
Type 2 conduit ...............................................................................................................
Ordering data .................................................................................................................
Qualified products list.....................................................................................................
Qualification provisions ..................................................................................................
D-6
D-7
D-7
D-7
D-7
D-7
D-7
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-8
D-9
D-9
D-9
D-10
D-10
D-10
D-12
D-12
D-12
D-12
D-12
D-13
D-13
D-14
D-14
D-14
D-14
D-14
D-14
D-14
D-15
D-15
D-15
INDEX ............................................................................................................................ D-16
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS
Figure
1
2
3
4
Page
Conduit configuration .....................................................................................................
Typical braid section ......................................................................................................
Bend-radius test setup ...................................................................................................
Typical pickup coil..........................................................................................................
D-4
D-10
D-11
D-13
LIST OF TABLES
Table
I
II
III
IV
V
Page
Conduit dimensions (inches) ........................................................................................
Materials inspection ......................................................................................................
Qualification inspection .................................................................................................
Quality conformance inspection ....................................................................................
Data for bend-radius test ...............................................................................................
D-5
D-7
D-8
D-9
D-11
D-iii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FOREWORD
As mentioned in section 1, this appendix contains a specification which establishes new standards
for flexible shielding conduit. It describes standard dimensions and tolerances for 11 different sizes of
conduit, including minimum ID, OD over braid, and OD over jacket. The format is similar to that of a
Military Specification, since it is intended that this document will be published eventually as a Military
Specification. The requirements of this specification apply in the interim between the date of publication of
this handbook and the date of publication of the official Military Specification. This specification
supersedes the flexible conduit specification in Appendix 1 of NAVSEA 0967-LP-283-5010. Flexible
shielding conduit is specified as the primary means of shielding electrical cable in submarines and other
ships and has applied to submarines built under contracts dated from October 1969.
It should be noted that whenever a reference is made in this appendix to a paragraph number,
that number applies to the paragraphs located in the other sections of this handbook.
D-iv
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX D
SPECIFICATION
CONDUIT, METAL, FLEXIBLE, FOR LOW FREQUENCY
ELECTROMAGNETIC SHIELDING APPLICATIONS
1.
SCOPE
1.1
Scope. This specification establishes the requirements for manufacture and Government
acceptance of flexible metal conduit for low frequency shielding applications (see 6.1).
1.2
1.2.1
Classification.
Types. Flexible metal conduit shall be of the following types, as specified (see 6.2):
Type 1 - Nonjacketed shielding conduit
Type 2 - Rubber-jacketed shielding conduit
1.2.2
Conduit Part Number. The part number for qualified conduit procured in accordance with
this specification shall consist of the basic part designation, the conduit size code, and the conduit
type code. The part number development is illustrated in the following example.
Beneficial comments (recommendations, additions, deletions) and any pertinent
data which may be of use in proving this document should be addressed to
Commander, Naval Sea Systems Command, Code 05H3, Washington, DC 20375.
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
D-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
2.
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
2.1
Issues of Documents. The following documents, of the issue in effect on date of invitation for
bids or request for proposal, form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein.
SPECIFICATIONS
Federal
QQ-B-650
-
Brazing Alloys, Copper, Copper-Zinc, and Copper-Phosphorous.
QQ-S-763
-
Steel Bars, Wire, Shapes, and Forgings, Corrosion Resisting.
-
Preservation-Packaging, Methods of.
Military
MIL-P-116
MIL-PRF-24758A
Conduit Systems, Flexible
MIL-R-6855
-
Rubber, Synthetic, Sheets, Strips, Molded or Extruded Shapes.
MIL-I-23053
-
Insulation Sleeving, Electrical, Heat-Shrinkable, General
Specification for.
MIL-R-46846
-
Rubber, Synthetic, Heat Shrinkable.
-
Marking for Shipment and Storage.
STANDARDS
Military
MIL-STD-129
(Copies of specifications, standards, drawings, and publications required by contractors in connection
with specific procurement functions should be obtained from the procuring activity or as directed by
the contracting officer,)
2.2
Other Publications. The following documents form part of this specification to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise indicated, the issue in effect on date of invitation for bids or
request for proposal shall apply.
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ANSI/ASTM-A-698
-
Magnetic Shield Efficiency in Attenuating Alternating Magnetic
Fields.
ANSI/ASTM-A-753
-
Specification for Nickel-Iron Soft Magnetic Alloys.
ASTM-D-257
Surface Volume Resistivity
(Application for copies should be addressed to the American Society for Testing and Materials,
1916 Race Street, Philadelphia, PA 19103.)
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
D-2
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
3.
REQUIREMENTS
3.1
Classification of requirements. The requirements for the conduit are classified herein as
follows:
Requirement
Paragraph
Qualification ......................................................................... 3.2
Quality conformance ............................................................ 3.3
Design and construction ...................................................... 3.4
Materials............................................................................... 3.5
Physical characteristics........................................................ 3.6
Performance characteristics ................................................ 3.7
Interchangeability................................................................. 3.8
Marking ................................................................................ 3.9
Manufacturer’s technical data .............................................. 3.10
Workmanship ....................................................................... 3.11
3.2
Qualification. Flexible metal conduit furnished under this specification shall be products which
are qualified for listing on the applicable qualified products list at the time set for opening of bids (see
4.4 and 6.3).
3.3
Quality conformance. The contractor shall test an initial production sample from each
production lot for conformance with specification requirements prior to regular production on a
contract (see 4.5).
3.4
Design and construction. Type 1 conduit (figure 1a) shall consist of metal tubing covered with
a wire overbraid. The tubing material shall be an alloy having high magnetic permeability for
electromagnetic shielding requirements and shall be corrosion resistant for environmental
requirements. Construction of the tubing shall be in the form of helical or annular convolutes for
flexibility. Seams in the tubing shall be hermetically sealed for water-tightness and shielding integrity.
The outer braid covering shall be of steel wire for mechanical protection of the tubing. Type 2 conduit
(figure 1b) shall consist of Type 1 conduit which is covered with a jacket of synthetic rubber for
electrical insulation and marked on the outside with identification information.
3.5
Materials. Materials shall conform to applicable standards and be as specified herein.
Materials which are not covered by specifications or which are not specifically described herein shall
be of the best quality and shall be suitable for the purpose intended.
3.5.1
Tubing material. Material for the tubing and the coupling ring used for joining lengths of
tubing shall be an alloy having high magnetic permeability and corrosion-resistant properties, such as
provided by Alloy Type 4 of ANSI/ASTM-A-753. Typical trade names for this alloy include: Hipernom,
HyMu “80”, and Moly Permalloy.
3.5.2
Annealing of tubing material. All conduit tubing shall be annealed in accordance with
standard practice in order to develop magnetic shielding properties necessary to meet the shielding
effectiveness requirements of 3.7.3.
Reprinted without change
D-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FIGURE 1a. Type 1 Conduit
FIGURE 1b. Type 2 Conduit
FIGURE 1. Conduit configuration.
3.5.3 Seam interlock material. Seamsealing material, if used for hermetically sealing the tubing
convolutions, shall conform to requirements of QQ-B-650, Class Bcu-1.
3.5.4 Braid material. Braid for both Type 1 and Type 2 conduit shall be made of stainless steel
wire Class 304 or 321 as specified in QQ-S-763.
3.5.5 Jacket material. The jacket for Type 2 conduit shall be of synthetic rubber (polychloroprene)
conforming to Class 2A, Grade 60, of MIL-R-6855 or equivalent material conforming to MIL-PRF24758A. The material shall have a minimum volume resistivity of 1 x 109 ohm-cm as determined by
ASTM-D-257.
3.5.6 Heat-shrinkable tubing. Heat-shrinkable tubing, when used to cover splices in rubber
jackets, shall be of polychloroprene in accordance with Class 1 of MIL-I-23053/1, or Type I, Class 1,
of MIL-R-46846.
3.6
Physical characteristics.
3.6.1 Sizes and dimensions. The nominal sizes, and inside and outside diameters, shall be as
specified in Table I
CHANGE 2 of Revision 2
D-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
3.6.2 Lengths. Conduit shall be furnished in the length or lengths specified by the procuring activity
(see 6.2).
Table I. Conduit dimensions (inches).
Conduit
size
(nom)
Conduit
size
code
ID
(min)
Type 1 (nonjacketed)
Part
OD
number
(over braid)
Type 2 (jacketed)
Part
OD
number
(over braid)
Minimum
bend radius
(inside)
1/4
02
0.245
EM02
0.42 ±0.01
EM02R
0.58 ±0.04
1-1/4
3/8
03
0.370
EM03
0.54 ±0.01
EM03R
0.70 ±0.04
2
1/2
04
0.495
EM04
0.69 ±0.01
EM04R
0.85 ±0.04
2-1/2
5/8
05
0.620
EM05
0.82 ±0.01
EM05R
0.98 ±0.04
3
3/4
06
0.745
EM06
0.94 ±0.01
EM06R
1.10 ±0.04
3-3/4
1
08
0.995
EM08
1.25 ±0.01
EM08R
1.41 ±0.04
5
1-1/4
10
1.245
EM10
1.50 ±0.01
EM10R
1.66 ±0.04
6-1/4
1-1/2
12
1.495
EM12
1.75 ±0.01
EM12R
1.91 ±0.04
7-1/2
2
16
1.995
EM16
2.28 ±0.015
EM16R
2.44 ±0.045
10
2-1/2
20
2.495
EM20
2.78 ±0.015
EM20R
2.94 ±0.045
12-1/2
3
24
2.995
EM24
3.28 ±0.015
EM24R
3.44 ±0.045
15
3.6.3 Seams and joints. Seams in the metal tubing shall be welded or brazed, and there shall be no
reduction of the inside diameter or increase of outside diameter due to such welding or brazing.
Joints (or splices) in the metal tubing shall be welded or brazed, and there shall be no increase in the
outside diameter due to such welding or brazing. The coupling ring used for joining lengths of tubing
shall not reduce the inside diameter at the joint more than 0.028 inches (maximum wall thickness of
coupling ring inside the tubing shall be 0.014 inches). Material for the coupling ring shall be in
accordance with 3.5.1. Seams and joints shall meet the requirements for inner surfaces specified in
3.6.4 and for watertightness specified in 3.7.1.
3.6.4 Inner surfaces. The metal tubing shall have smooth inner surfaces free of sharp burrs or
edges that could abrade cable insulation. The interior shall be free also of particles of organic or
metallic material that could contaminate or degrade cable insulation or be potentially corrosive.
3.6.5 Braid. The braid shall be woven from stainless steel wire as specified in 3.5.4. The braid
shall be applied with sufficient tension so that there will be no looseness or bunching of the braid on
the tubing. The braid shall provide a coverage of at least 90 percent of the tubing, as determined by
the method of 4.6.3. Unless otherwise specified, only one layer of braid shall be applied.
3.6.6 Rubber jacket. The rubber jacket for Type 2 conduit shall be of a uniform thickness and free
from pitting, and shall be applied with sufficient stretch around the circumference of the conduit to
maintain a tight fit over the conduit braid. The wall thickness for the rubber jacket shall be 0.080
±0.015 inches for all conduit sizes.
D-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
3.6.7 Splices. Two lengths of metal tubing shall be spliced (or joined) in accordance with 3.6.3.
Splices in braid wires shall be neatly made and shall cause no sharp or rough projection on the
conduit. Splices in the rubber jacket may be made either by a 3-inch (minimum) overlap, or by means
of a butt joint that is covered with a 6-inch (minimum) length of heat-shrinkable polychloroprene tubing
(see 3.5.6),
3.6.8 Ends. The ends of each length of conduit shall be cut square, with the ends of the braid wires
secured to the tubing by brazing. Each end of the conduit shall be free from sharp edges, burrs, or
excess brazing material which would interfere with the attachment of fittings.
3.7
Performance characteristics.
3.7.1 Watertightness. Conduit shall show no evidence of leakage or damage to the tubing when
tested as specified in 4.6.5. If any section of the conduit fails to pass the test of 4.6.5, that section
shall be rejected and any remaining conduit can be deemed acceptable only if it can be demonstrated
by test that all of it is in compliance with requirements.
3.7.2 Bend radius. When tested as specified in 4.6.6, Type 1 and Type 2 conduit shall withstand
bending in an arc of radius equal to that specified in Table I and shall show no evidence of internal
obstruction or damage, of any kind to the tubing as a result of the test. Type 2 conduit shall, in
addition, show minimum wrinkling of the rubber jacket on the inside of the bend when bent to the
prescribed radius. Any failure of the test sample to meet the bend radius requirement shall be cause
for rejection of the sample and of the production lot from which the samples were taken.
3.7.3 Shielding effectiveness. Shielding effectiveness throughout the frequency range of 30 Hz to
30 kHz shall be a minimum of 40dB for all conduit less than 2 inches in diameter and a minimum of 35
dB for 2-inch diameter conduit and larger when tested as specified in 4.6.7. Any failure of the test
sample to meet the shielding effectiveness requirement shall be cause for rejection of the sample and
of the production lot from which the samples were taken.
3.8
Interchangeability. All flexible metal conduit manufactured to this specification and having the
same part number shall be completely interchangeable with each other with respect to physical
(dimensional) and performance (functional) characteristics as specified herein.
3.9
Marking. The rubber jacket of Type 2 conduit shall be marked with an identifying legend
printed with white ink in block character type. The size of this lettering shall be not less than 1/8 inch
nor more than 1/4 inch. The legend shall consist of the wording "EMI SHIELDING CONDUIT," the
conduit part number (see 1.2.2), and the manufacturer's name. Example of legend:
EMI SHIELDING CONDUIT - EM06R - (manufacturer's name)
The legend shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding two feet. The print shall not be obliterated by
the action of petroleum base oil, fuels, hydraulic fluids, or water, and shall remain legible after
abrasion caused by normal handling of the conduit. (See 5.3 for identification tags.)
3.10 Manufacturer's technical data. Manufacturer's technical data shall be furnished with the
conduit supplied under this specification and shall include lot number, conduit part number,
dimensions with tolerances, weight per foot, materials, and marking information.
3.11 Workmanship. All details of manufacture shall be in accordance with best practice for flexible
metal conduit. The conduit shall be free from all defects which would adversely affect its
serviceability.
D-6
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
4.
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS
4.1
Responsibility for inspection. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, the supplier is
responsible for the performance of all inspection requirements as specified herein. except as
otherwise specified in the contract, the supplier may use his own or any other facility suitable for the
performance of the inspection requirements specified herein, unless disapproved by the Government.
The Government reserves the right to perform any of the inspections set forth in this specification
where such inspections are deemed necessary to assure supplies and services conform to prescribed
requirements.
4.1.1 Test equipment and inspection facilities. Test and measuring equipment and inspection
facilities of sufficient accuracy, quality, and quantity to permit performance of the required inspection
shall be established and maintained by the supplier and/or a government approved subcontract
facility.
4.2
Classification of inspections. The inspections for the conduit are classified herein as follows:
Inspection
Paragraph
Materials inspection ...................................................................................... 4.3
Qualification inspection ................................................................................. 4.4
Quality conformance inspection.................................................................... 4.5
4.3
Materials inspection. Materials inspection shall consist of certification that the materials and
annealing process listed in table II were used in fabricating the delivered flexible conduit.
4.4
Qualification inspection. Qualification inspection for inclusion in a qualified products list (QPL)
(see 6.3) shall be performed by the Government on test samples that were produced with equipment
and procedures normally used in production. The qualification test samples (see 4.4.1) shall be
subjected to the inspections specified in table III.
Table II. Materials inspection.
Material or process
Requirement
Paragraph
Applicable specification
Tubing
3.5.1
ANSI/ASTM-A-753, Alloy Type 4
Coupling ring
3.5.1
ANSI/ASTM-A-753, Alloy Type 4
Annealing
3.5.2
In accordance with standard practice
Seam interlock material
3.5.3
QQ-B-650, Class BCu-1
Braid
3.5.4
QQ-S-763, Class 304 or 321
Jacket
3.5.5
MIL-R-6855, Class 2A, Grade 60
Heatshrinkable tubing
3.5.6
MIL-I-230053/1, Class 1, or
MIL-R-46846, Type 1, Class 1
Reprinted without change
D-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table III. Qualification inspection.
Inspection
Requirement
Paragraph
Test method
Paragraph
3.6, 3.9, 3.11
4.6.1
Dimensional
3.6.1
4.6.2
Braid coverage
3.6.5
4.6.3
Tightness of covering
3.6.6
4.6.4
Watertightness
4.7.1
4.6.5
Bend radius
4.7.2
4.6.6
Shielding effectiveness
4.7.3
4.6.7
Visual
4.4.1 Qualification test sample. In testing for qualification, a test sample consisting of a single
length of conduit with ends treated as in 3.6.8 shall be submitted for each size and type that is to be
qualified. The length of the test sample shall be 4 feet for conduit less than 2 inches in diameter, 6
feet for 2-inch and 2-1/2 diameter, and 8 feet for 3-inch diameter conduit.
4.4.2
Failures. One or more failures shall be cause for refusal to grant qualification approval.
4.4.3 Qualification of similar conduit. Qualification of a manufacturer's Type 2 conduit will
automatically constitute qualification of that manufacturer's Type 1 conduit of the same size provided
that the construction, manufacturing process, and materials (excluding the rubber jacket) are identical
in both cases.
4.4.4 Retention of qualification. The Naval Sea Systems Command will request a certification
report at 2-year intervals from each manufacturer whose conduit is listed on the QPL. To retain
qualification, the manufacturer shall submit the certification signed by a responsible official of
management attesting that the conduit listed on qualified parts list is still available from the listed plant;
can be produced under the same conditions as originally qualified, i.e., same process, materials,
construction, design, manufacturer's part number, or designation; and meets the requirements of the
current specification. Failure to provide certification will be cause for removal from the QPL. After
completion of certification review, the QPL will be reprinted to show the date of validation. (DD
Form1718, Certification of Qualified Products, shall be used for obtaining certification.)
4.5
Quality conformance inspection. The supplier shall perform a quality conformance inspection
at the time of production on each production lot (see 4.5.1) manufactured under this specification to
prove compliance with applicable requirements. The quality conformance inspections shall be as
specified in table IV, in the order shown.
4.5.1 Production lot. Conduit of one size and type, and manufactured from the same materials
under essentially the same conditions during an identifiable production period, shall be considered a
production lot. The manufacturer shall assign a lot number, for identification purposes, to each
production lot.
4.6
Methods of inspection. Visual and dimensional inspections shall be made on each length of
bare tubing and on the completed conduit in accordance with 4.6.1, 4.6.2, 4.6.3, and 4.6.4. Any
defects or failure to meet the requirements specified in 3.6, 3.9, and 3.11 shall be corrected or shall
be cause for rejection.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-8
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
4.6.1 Visual inspection. Convoluted tubing shall be inspected prior to application of braid to verify
that there are no gaps, cracks, breaks, or other defects in material, construction, or workmanship.
4.6.2 Dimensional inspection. Measurements shall be made on the conduit to determine
compliance with dimensional requirements. Any dimension that is not within the specified tolerance
shall be classified a defect.
4.6.3 Braid coverage. The coverage of the wire braid shall be determined by measuring at three
widely separated areas of a length of conduit. The areas measured shall be representative of the
entire braid. The diagram of figure 2 shows a typical section of braid, with a unit area having
dimensions C and D. The uncovered portion of the unit area is shown by dimensions A and B. The
percent of braid coverage shall be computed by using the formula below, and shall equal minimum of
90 percent.
Percent of braid coverage = 100(1-AB/CD)
Table IV. Quality conformance inspection.
Inspection
Requirement
Paragraph
Test method
Paragraph
3.6, 3.9, 3.11
4.6.1
Dimensional 1/
3.6.1
4.6.2
Watertightness 1/
3.7.1
4.6.5
3.6, 3.9, 3.11
4.6.1
Dimensional 2/
3.6.1
4.6.2
Braid coverage 2/
3.6.5
4.6.3
Tightness of covering 2/
3.6.6
4.6.4
Bend radius 3/
3.7.2
4.6.6
Shielding effectiveness 3/
4/
3.7.3
4.6.7
Visual 1/
Visual 2/
1/ Inspection shall be performed on each length of bare tubing, prior to application of
braid.
2/ Inspection shall be performed on each length of completed conduit, for both Type
1 and Type 2.
3/ Inspection shall be performed on one sample from each production lot.
4/ The production-lot shielding effectiveness test nee be conducted at only one
frequency. The frequency selected is optional to the supplier but shall be a
frequency between 30 and 100 Hz.
Reprinted without change
D-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FIGURE 2. Typical braid section.
4.6.4 Tightness of covering. For Type 1 and Type 2 conduit the wire braid shall have a tight fit over
the tubing. For Type 2 conduit the rubber jacket shall have a tight fit over the wire braid.
4.6.5 Watertightness. Watertight integrity shall be determined by a pressure test on bare tubing,
i.e., conduit without braid and jacket coverings. This test shall be performed on each and every length
manufactured under this specification. The tubing ends shall be capped and sealed. The capped
tubing shall then be pressurized internally to 15 psig with air and fully immersed in water. There shall
be no visible air leakage from the tubing.
4.6.6 Bend radius. The sample for the bend-radius test shall be 4 feet long for all conduit less than
2 inches in diameter, 6 feet long for 2-inch and 2-1/2 inch diameter, and 8 feet long for 3-inch
diameter conduit. The braid ends shall be brazed to the tubing as in 3.6.8. Type 2 conduit samples
shall be tested with their rubber jacket. One end of the sample shall be fastened tangentially to a
cylindrical mandrel that is mounted with its axis horizontal. See figure 3a. The radius of the mandrel
shall be as specified in table V. The conduit sample shall hang vertically, and the test load specified in
table V shall be attached to its lower end. The mandrel shall be rotated 270 degrees to the position
shown in figure 3b. The conduit shall be in contact with the mandrel over a typical 180-degree sector
(see figure 3b.) Failure of the conduit to come within 1/16 inch of the mandrel at any point along its
curvature over the 180-degree sector shall constitute cause for rejection.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-10
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FIGURE 3. Bend-radius test setup.
TABLE V. Data for bend-radius test.
Size (in.)
(nom ID)
Conduit test sample
Size
code
Length
(ft)
Type 1
conduit
Test load
Type 2
conduit
Mandrel
radius
(in.)
1/4
02
4
1/2
1/2
1-1/4
3/8
03
4
1/2
1/2
2
1/2
04
4
1/2
1/2
2-1/2
5/8
05
4
1/2
1/2
3
3/4
06
4
1/2
1/2
3-3/4
1
08
4
1/2
1
5
1-1/4
10
4
1
1-1/2
6-1/4
1-1/2
12
4
1-1/2
2
7-1/2
2
16
6
2
2
10
2-1/2
20
6
3
3
12-1/2
3
24
8
5
5
15
Reprinted without change
D-11
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
4.6.7 Shielding effectiveness. After completion of the bend-radius test of 4.6.6, the sample, with
braid ends brazed to the tubing as in 3.6.8, shall be subjected to two bend cycles, where one bend
cycle entails bending the center section through a 90-degree arc over the mandrel of 4.6.6,
straightening it, bending the center section 90 degrees in the opposite direction over the same
mandrel and straightening it to complete the cycle. The sample shall then be tested for effectiveness
of shielding against a transverse magnetic field having a field intensity of 1 oersted over the frequency
range of 30 Hz to 30 kHz. The test method shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASTM-A-698, with the
following exceptions:
a.
The inside diameter of each Helmholtz coil section shall be 35cm.
b.
The center section of the conduit shall be symmetrically positioned between coil
sections with its axis in the plane of the coils and with its ends extending out
straight and beyond the coil sections.
c.
The pickup coil shall be designed to fit inside the long tubular shape of the conduit.
The coil shall provide an adequate signal over the frequency range 30 Hz to 30
kHz. Figure 4 shows the design of such a coil with typical dimensions suitable for
use with conduit as small as 1/4-inch size.
Note: Particular care should be taken to maintain the plane of the pickup parallel to the
planes of the helmholtz coil sections. Steel end caps may be required on the test
sample (particularly on the larger sizes) to preclude flux leakage into the open
ends of the conduit.
4.7
Test reports. The supplier shall prepare a test report for each production lot (see 4.5.1). The
test report shall include the following: the production lot number, a certification of materials inspection
(see 4.3) which applies to the production lot, a certification that all of the conduit in the production lot is
identical to a qualified test sample (see 4.4), and certification that each of the quality conformance
inspections of 4.5 has been performed and any conduit that is defective, or fails to meet requirements,
has been either corrected or rejected. All test reports shall be retained on file by the manufacturer of
the conduit and shall be available for review for a period of 2 years following product fabrication. Test
reports, in duplicate shall be furnished when required by the contract or order (see 6.2).
4.8
Quality assurance. All conduit manufactured under this specification shall be identical to
qualified test samples. The conduit shall be subject to DCAS (Defense Contract Administration
Service) inspection at source of shipment when specified by the contract or order (see 6.2).
5.
PACKAGING
5.1
Cleaning. Any conduit produced to this specification shall be manufactured under processes
which have sufficient quality control procedures to prevent contamination. However, and conduit not
meeting the cleanliness requirement of 3.6.4 can be processed in accordance with MIL-P-116 process
C1 in order to meet the requirements of 3.6.4. Any drying procedure shall not be injurious to the
finished product.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-12
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
FIGURE 4. Typical pickup coil.
5.2
Preservatives. No preservatives, paints, or coatings shall be applied to the conduit. Conduit
shall be sufficiently clean such that precleaning the conduit will not be necessary in order to obtain a
good metal-to-metal contact between fitting and conduit.
5.3
Identification tags. Each length of conduit shall be separately labeled by means of metal tags
to provide identification information for supply, installation, and repair personnel. These identification
tags are in addition to the conduit markings of 3.9. The tags shall be imprinted with the following
information:
a.
EMI SHIELDING CONDUIT.
b.
Conduit part number (see 1.2.2).
c.
Manufacturer's name.
d.
Production-lot number (see 4.5.1).
e.
Date of Manufacture.
D-13
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
The metal tags shall imprinted using stamped, etched, or indelible lettering. One such tag shall be
firmly attached near each end of each length of conduit. Attach tags over the braid of Type 1 conduit
and over the jacket of Type 2 conduit.
5.4
Unit packaging. The brazed ends (see 3.6.8) of each length of conduit shall be capped to
prevent entrance of foreign matter. Long lengths of conduit shall be furnished in coils or reels of
sufficient diameter to prevent excessive bending of the conduit. Excessive bending is considered to
be a bend radius less than 10 times the diameter of the conduit being coiled. Coils shall be securely
tied in three or more places equidistantly spaced around the circumference of the coil.
5.5
Wrapping. Conduit shall be wrapped in rust preventive paper or sealed in a plastic bags, and
packed in a manner that will ensure adequate protection of the conduit from physical chemical
damage during shipment and during long-term storage in adverse environments.
5.6
Marking of shipping containers. Shipping containers shall bear the information in indelible
lettering (reference MIL-STD-129):
a.
EMI SHIELDING CONDUIT.
b.
Part number (s) (see 1.2.2).
c.
Length (s).
d.
Manufacturer's name.
e.
Manufacturer's part number (s).
f.
Purchase order number.
g.
Total weight.
h.
Net weight.
Each container shall, in addition, be marked "HANDLE WITH CARE" and "DO NOT DROP."
6.
NOTES
6.1
Intended use. The purpose of this conduit is to shield low-level signal cables from the
influence of external magnetic fields. It can also be used, within saturation limits of the conduit
material, to reduce magnetic field radiation from power and transmitting cables. The primary
frequencies of interest are those below 100 kHz.
6.1.1 Type 1 conduit. Type 1 nonjacketed conduit is used in installations where ground or
structureborne currents are minimal along the path of the conduit or where the cable being shielded is
not susceptible to interference from current flow along the conduit. (Conduit can become a conductor
for ground or structureborne currents through contacts with ground potentials along the length of the
conduit.)
6.1.2 Type 2 conduit. Type 2 conduit is used for shielding an extremely low-level signal cable which
would be susceptible to interference from current flowing along the conduit. The rubber jacket
prevents this current flow by electrically insulating the conduit from unintentional ground contacts.
D-14
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
6.2
Ordering data. Procurement documents should specify the following:
a.
Name of item: “Shielding conduit, per S9407-AB-HBK-010.”
b.
Type of conduit to be furnished (see 1.2.1).
c.
Conduit size (nominal ID, see table I).
d.
Conduit part number.
e.
Length (s), and tolerances, if required.
f.
Type of splice in rubber jacket (specify, if necessary, either overlap or butt joint, see
3.6.7).
g.
Special marking, if required.
h.
Certified test reports, if required (see 4.7).
i.
DCAS inspection, if required (see 4.8).
6.3
Qualified products list. A qualified products list for flexible conduit for low frequency shielding is
maintained for Navy procurement purposes. It provides information concerning flexible conduit which
meets the requirements specified herein. Manufacturers wishing to have their product tested for
qualification should send samples as set forth in 4.4.1, together with manufacturer’s technical data as
specified in 3.10, to Naval Undersea Warfare Center, Code 3431, Newport, RI 02841-1708. No
indebtedness between the U.S. Government and any manufacturer will be incurred in connection with
the qualification testing described herein. Samples sent for testing shall be sent prepaid by the
manufacturer and will not be returned.
6.3.1 Qualification provisions. Conduit which is tested shall meet the requirements of this
specification in order to be approved by Naval Sea Systems Command and added to the qualified
products list. Listing of a product does not release the supplier from compliance with the specification
requirements and connote endorsement of the product by the Navy. Information concerning this
listing is available from the Naval Sea Systems Command, Code 05K2B, Arlington, VA 22242,
telephone (703) 602-2549.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
INDEX
Paragragh
Page
Annealing of tubing material.................................................... 3.5.2..................................... D-3
Applicable documents ............................................................. 2........................................... D-2
Bend radius ............................................................................. 3.7.2, 4.6.6........................... D-6, D-10
Braid ........................................................................................ 3.6.5..................................... D-5
Braid coverage ........................................................................ 4.6.3..................................... D-9
Braid material .......................................................................... 3.5.4..................................... D-4
Classification ........................................................................... 1.2........................................ D-1
Types ................................................................................ 1.2.1..................................... D-1
Conduit part number ......................................................... 1.2.2..................................... D-1
Classification of inspection ...................................................... 4.2........................................ D-7
Classification of requirements ................................................. 3.1........................................ D-3
Cleaning .................................................................................. 5.1........................................ D-12
Conduit part number................................................................ 1.2.2..................................... D-1
Design and construction.......................................................... 3.4........................................ D-3
Dimensional inspection ........................................................... 4.6.2..................................... D-9
Ends ........................................................................................ 3.6.8..................................... D-6
Failures.................................................................................... 4.4.2..................................... D-8
Heat-shrinkable tubing ............................................................ 3.5.6..................................... D-4
Identification tags .................................................................... 5.3........................................ D-13
Inner surfaces ......................................................................... 3.6.4..................................... D-5
Intended use............................................................................ 6.1........................................ D-14
Type 1 conduit .................................................................. 6.1.1..................................... D-14
Type 2 conduit .................................................................. 6.1.2..................................... D-14
Interchangeability .................................................................... 3.8........................................ D-6
Issues of documents ............................................................... 2.1........................................ D-2
Jacket material ........................................................................ 3.5.5..................................... D-4
Lengths.................................................................................... 3.6.2..................................... D-5
Manufacturer’s technical data ................................................. 3.10...................................... D-6
Marking.................................................................................... 3.9........................................ D-6
Marking of shipping containers ............................................... 5.6........................................ D-14
Materials.................................................................................. 3.5........................................ D-3
Tubing material ................................................................. 3.5.1..................................... D-3
Annealing of tubing material ............................................. 3.5.2..................................... D-3
Seam interlock material .................................................... 3.5.3..................................... D-4
Braid material.................................................................... 3.5.4..................................... D-4
Jacket material.................................................................. 3.5.5..................................... D-4
Heat-shrinkable material................................................... 3.5.6..................................... D-4
Materials inspection................................................................. 4.3........................................ D-7
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-16
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
INDEX
Paragragh
Page
Methods of inspection.............................................................. 4.6 ........................................D-8
Visual inspection ............................................................... 4.6.1 .....................................D-9
Dimensional inspection ..................................................... 4.6.2 .....................................D-9
Braid coverage .................................................................. 4.6.3 .....................................D-9
Tightness of covering ........................................................ 4.6.4 .....................................D-10
Watertightness .................................................................. 3.7.1, 4.6.5 ...........................D-6, D-10
Bend radius ....................................................................... 3.7.2, 4.6.6 ...........................D-6, D-10
Shielding effectiveness...................................................... 3.7.3, 4.6.7 ...........................D-6, D-12
Notes ....................................................................................... 6 ...........................................D-14
Ordering data........................................................................... 6.2 ........................................D-15
Other publications .................................................................... 2.2 ........................................D-2
Packaging ................................................................................ 5 ...........................................D-12
Performance characteristics .................................................... 3.7 ........................................D-6
Watertightness .................................................................. 3.7.1 .....................................D-6
Bend radius ....................................................................... 3.7.2 .....................................D-6
Shielding effectiveness...................................................... 3.7.3 .....................................D-6
Physical characteristics ........................................................... 3.6 ........................................D-4
Sizes and dimensions ....................................................... 3.6.1 .....................................D-4
Lengths.............................................................................. 3.6.2 .....................................D-5
Seams and joints............................................................... 3.6.3 .....................................D-5
Inner surfaces ................................................................... 3.6.4 .....................................D-5
Braid .................................................................................. 3.6.5 .....................................D-5
Rubber jacket .................................................................... 3.6.6 .....................................D-5
Splices............................................................................... 3.6.7 .....................................D-6
Ends .................................................................................. 3.6.8 .....................................D-6
Qualification ............................................................................. 3.2 ........................................D-3
Qualification inspection............................................................ 4.4 ........................................D-7
Qualification test sample ................................................... 4.4.1 .....................................D-8
Failures.............................................................................. 4.4.2 .....................................D-8
Retention of qualifications ................................................. 4.4.4 .....................................D-8
Qualification of similar conduit ................................................. 4.4.3 .....................................D-8
Qualification provisions ............................................................ 6.3.1 .....................................D-15
Qualification test sample.......................................................... 4.4.1 .....................................D-8
Qualified products list .............................................................. 6.3 ........................................D-15
Qualification provisions ..................................................... 6.3.1 .....................................D-15
Quality assurance .................................................................... 4.8 ........................................D-12
Quality assurance provisions ................................................... 4. .........................................D-7
Quality conformance................................................................ 3.3 ........................................D-3
Quality conformance inspection............................................... 4.5 ........................................D-8
Production lot .................................................................... 4.5.1 .....................................D-8
Requirements .......................................................................... 3 ...........................................D-3
Responsibility for inspection .................................................... 4.1 ........................................D-7
Test equipment and inspection facilities ........................... 4.1.1 .....................................D-7
Retention of qualification ......................................................... 4.4.4 .....................................D-8
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
INDEX
Paragragh
Page
Rubber jacket .......................................................................... 3.6.6..................................... D-5
Scope ...................................................................................... 1.,1.1.................................... D-1
Seam interlock material........................................................... 3.5.3..................................... D-4
Seams and joints..................................................................... 3.6.3..................................... D-5
Shielding effectiveness............................................................ 3.7.3, 4.6.7........................... D-6, D-12
Sizes and dimensions ............................................................. 3.6.1..................................... D-4
Splices..................................................................................... 3.6.7..................................... D-6
Test equipment and inspection facilities ................................. 4.1.1..................................... D-7
Test reports ............................................................................. 4.7........................................ D-12
Tightness of covering .............................................................. 4.6.4..................................... D-10
Tubing material........................................................................ 3.5.1..................................... D-3
Types....................................................................................... 1.2.1..................................... D-1
Type 1 conduit......................................................................... 6.1.1..................................... D-14
Type 2 conduit......................................................................... 6.1.2..................................... D-14
Unit packaging......................................................................... 5.4........................................ D-14
Visual inspection ..................................................................... 4.6.1..................................... D-9
Watertightness ........................................................................ 3.7.1, 4.6.5........................... D-6, D-10
Workmanship .......................................................................... 3.11...................................... D-6
Wrapping................................................................................. 5.5........................................ D-14
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
D-18
APPENDIX E
CABLE COMPARISON CHART
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX E
CABLE COMPARISON CHART
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
E-1
E-2
Page
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ E-1
INTENDED USE OF MIL-C-24640 CABLES .............................................................. E-1
LIST OF TABLES
Table
E-1
Page
Cable Comparison Chart ............................................................................................ E-2
E-i/E-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX E
CABLE COMPARISON CHART
E-1
INTRODUCTION
This cable comparison chart is presented for reference purposes. It compares the MIL-C-915
Shipboard cable types with its equivalent MIL-C-24643 Low-Smoke types, and also with its equivalent
MIL-C-24640 Lightweight types.
Note that the slash numbers of the equivalent types do not agree with each other. For example,
the equivalent for the TTOP type, MIL-C-915/24 is the Low-Smoke LSTTOP type, MIL-C-24643/12, and
is the Lightweight TTX type, MIL-C-24640/4. Also note that the Low-Smoke version of the TTOP type is
identified by LSTTOP. The letters "LS" precede the MIL-C-915 "TTOP" designation to indicate the LowSmoke version. The Lightweight version of the TTOP type is TTX.
E-2
INTENDED USE OF MIL-C-24640 CABLES
The MIL-C-24640 Lightweight cables are not direct replacement conversions and shall not be
used to replace existing MIL-C-915 or MIL-C-24643 cables. Overall diameters have been reduced and
electrical characteristics have been changed.
E-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
01
CVSF-4
02
OBSOLETE
03
DCOP-1
DCOP-1-1/2
DCOP-2
E-2
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
01
LSCVSF-4
02
LSDCOP-1
LSDCOP-1-1/2
LSDCOP-2
03
04
05
06
TCOP-2
OBSOLETE
DLT
SHOF-3
SHOF-23
SHOF-60
SHOF-150
SHOF-200
SHOF-250
SHOF-500
SHOF-650
SHOF-800
02
LSTCOP-2
03
LSSHOF-3
LSSHOF-23
LSSHOF-60
LSSHOF-150
LSSHOF-200
LSSHOF-250
LSSHOF-500
LSSHOF-650
LSSHOF-800
06
DHOF-3
DHOF-4
DHOF-6
DHOF-9
DHOF-14
DHOF-23
DHOF-30
DHOF-83
DHOF-250
DHOF-400
03
LSDHOF-3
LSDHOF-4
LSDHOF-6
LSDHOF-9
LSDHOF-14
LSDHOF-23
LSDHOF-30
LSDHOF-83
LSDHOF-250
LSDHOF-400
06
THOF-3
THOF-4
THOF-6
THOF-9
THOF-14
THOF-23
THOF-42
THOF-150
THOF-250
THOF-400
THOF-500
THOF-600
03
LSTHOF-3
LSTHOF-4
LSTHOF-6
LSTHOF-9
LSTHOF-14
LSTHOF-23
LSTHOF-42
LSTHOF-150
LSTHOF-250
LSTHOF-400
LSTHOF-500
LSTHOF-600
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
06
FHOF-3
FHOF-4
FHOF-9
FHOF-42
FHOF-60
FHOF-133
07
DSWS-4
08
DSS-2
DSS-3
DSS-4
08
TSS-2
TSS-3
TSS-4
08
FSS-2
FSS-3
FSS-4
08
09
10
11
7SS-2
JAS
MCSF-4
MCOS-2
MCOS-4
MCOS-5
MCOS-6
MCOS-7
MDU-6
MDU-14
MDU-23
MDU-40
MDU-60
MDY-6
MDY-14
MDY-23
MDY-40
MDY-60
12
13
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
03
LSFHOF-3
LSFHOF-4
LSFHOF-9
LSFHOF-42
LSFHOF-60
LSFHOF-133
04
05
06
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
LSMCOS-2
LSMCOS-4
LSMCOS-5
LSMCOS-6
LSMCOS-7
LSMDU-6
LSMDU-14
LSMDU-23
LSMDU-40
LSMDU-60
LSMDY-6
LSMDY-14
LSMDY-23
LSMDY-40
LSMDY-60
E-3
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
14
MHOF-7
MHOF-10
MHOF-14
MHOF-19
MHOF-24
MHOF-30
MHOF-37
MHOF-44
MHOF-61
15
MMOP-5
16
MRI-D-1
MRI-D-2-1/2
16
17
MRI-T-2-1/2
PBTMU-5
PBTMU-15
PBTMU-30
09
10
LSMRI-T-2-1/2
LSPBTMU-5
LSPBTMU-15
LSPBTMU-30
17
PBTM-5
PBTM-15
PBTM-30
10
LSPBTMU-5
LSPBTMU-15
LSPBTMU-30
18
19
20
SSF-300
TPU-6
TRF-105
TRF-133
TRF-168
TRXF-84
TRXF-105
TRXF-133
TSP-11
TSP-31
TSPA-11
TSPA-31
11
LSSSF-300
21
22
22
23
E-4
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
07
LSMHOF-7
LSMHOF-10
LSMHOF-14
LSMHOF-19
LSMHOF-24
LSMHOF-30
LSMHOF-37
LSMHOF-44
LSMHOF-61
08
LSMMOP-5
09
LSMRI-D-1
LSMRI-D-2-1/2
OBSOLETE
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
24
TTOP-3
TTOP-5
TTOP-10
TTOP-15
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
12
LSTTOP-3
LSTTOP-5
LSTTOP-10
LSTTOP-15
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
04
TTX-3
--04
TTX-15
04
25
25
26
27
28
TTRS-2
TTRS-4
TTRS-6
TTRS-8
TTRS-10
TTRS-12
TTRS-16
TTRSA-2
TTRSA-4
TTRSA-6
TTRSA-8
TTRSA-10
TTRSA-12
TTRSA-16
OBSOLETE
OBSOLETE
SSGU-50
SSGU-75
SSGU-100
SSGU-200
SSGU-300
SSGU-400
SSGU-650
SSGU-800
SSGU-1000
SSGU-1600
SSGU-2000
13
13
14
LSTTRS-2
LSTTRS-4
LSTTRS-6
LSTTRS-8
LSTTRS-10
LSTTRS-12
LSTTRS-16
LSTTRSA-2
LSTTRSA-4
LSTTRSA-6
LSTTRSA-8
LSTTRSA-10
LSTTRSA-12
LSTTRSA-16
05
TTXA-3
TTXA-15
TTXS-2
TTXS-4
05
TTXSA-2
TTXSA-4
05
TTXSA-2
TTXSA-4
TTXSA-8
TTXSA-10
LSSSGU-50
LSSSGU-75
LSSSGU-100
LSSSGU-200
LSSSGU-300
LSSSGU-400
LSSSGU-650
LSSSGU-800
LSSSGU-1000
LSSSGU-1600
LSSSGU-2000
E-5
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
28
SSGA-50
SSGA-75
SSGA-100
SSGA-200
SSGA-300
SSGA-400
SSGA-650
SSGA-800
SSGA-1000
SSGA-1600
SSGA-2000
29
DSGU-3
DSGU-4
DSGU-9
DSGU-14
DSGU-23
DSGU-50
DSGU-75
DSGU-100
DSGU-200
DSGU-300
DSGU-400
29
DSGA-3
DSGA-4
DSGA-9
DSGA-14
DSGA-23
DSGA-50
DSGA-75
DSGA-100
DSGA-200
DSGA-300
DSGA-400
E-6
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
14
LSSSGA-50
LSSSGA-75
LSSSGA-100
LSSSGA-200
LSSSGA-300
LSSSGA-400
LSSSGA-650
LSSSGA-800
LSSSGA-1000
LSSSGA-1600
LSSSGA-2000
15
LSDSGU-3
LSDSGU-4
LSDSGU-9
LSDSGU-14
LSDSGU-23
LSDSGU-50
LSDSGU-75
LSDSGU-100
LSDSGU-200
LSDSGU-300
LSDSGU-400
15
LSDSGA-3
LSDSGA-4
LSDSGA-9
LSDSGA-14
LSDSGA-23
LSDSGA-50
LSDSGA-75
LSDSGA-100
LSDSGA-200
LSDSGA-300
LSDSGA-400
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
19
DXW-3
DXW-4
19
DXWA-3
DXWA-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
30
TSGU-3
TSGU-4
TSGU-9
TSGU-14
TSGU-23
TSGU-50
TSGU-75
TSGU-100
TSGU-150
TSGU-200
TSGU-300
TSGU-400
30
TSGA-3
TSGA-4
TSGA-9
TSGA-14
30
TSGA-23
TSGA-50
TSGA-75
TSGA-100
TSGA-150
TSGA-200
TSGA-300
TSGA-400
31
FSGU-3
FSGU-4
FSGU-9
FSGU-14
FSGU-23
FSGU-50
FSGU-75
FSGU-100
FSGU-150
FSGU-200
31
FSGA-3
FSGA-4
FSGA-9
FSGA-14
FSGA-23
FSGA-50
FSGA-75
FSGA-100
FSGA-150
FSGA-200
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
16
LSTSGU-3
LSTSGU-4
LSTSGU-9
LSTSGU-14
LSTSGU-23
LSTSGU-50
LSTSGU-75
LSTSGU-100
LSTSGU-150
LSTSGU-200
LSTSGU-300
LSTSGU-400
16
LSTSGA-3
LSTSGA-4
LSTSGA-9
LSTSGA-14
16
LSTSGA-23
LSTSGA-50
LSTSGA-75
LSTSGA-100
LSTSGA-150
LSTSGA-200
LSTSGA-300
LSTSGA-400
17
LSFSGU-3
LSFSGU-4
LSFSGU-9
LSFSGU-14
LSFSGU-23
LSFSGU-50
LSFSGU-75
LSFSGU-100
LSFSGU-150
LSFSGU-200
17
LSFSGA-3
LSFSGA-4
LSFSGA-9
LSFSGA-14
LSFSGA-23
LSFSGA-50
LSFSGA-75
LSFSGA-100
LSFSGA-150
LSFSGA-200
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
20
TXW-3
TXW-4
20
TXWA-3
TXWA-4
21
FXW-3
FXW-4
21
FXWA-3
FXWA-4
E-7
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
32
MSCU-7
MSCU-10
MSCU-14
MSCU-19
MSCU-24
MSCU-30
MSCU-37
MSCU-44
MSCU-61
MSCU-91
32
MSCA-7
MSCA-10
MSCA-14
MSCA-19
MSCA-24
MSCA-30
MSCA-37
MSCA-44
MSCA-61
MSCA-91
32
MSCS-7
MSCS-10
MSCS-14
MSCS-19
MSCS-24
MSCS-30
MSCS-37
MSCS-44
MSCS-61
MSCS-91
33
6SGU-100
6SGU-125
6SGU-150
6SGU-200
33
6SGA-100
6SGA-125
6SGA-150
6SGA-200
34
7SGU-3
7SGU-4
E-8
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
18
LSMSCU-7
LSMSCU-10
LSMSCU-14
LSMSCU-19
LSMSCU-24
LSMSCU-30
LSMSCU-37
LSMSCU-44
LSMSCU-61
LSMSCU-91
18
LSMSCA-7
LSMSCA-10
LSMSCA-14
LSMSCA-19
LSMSCA-24
LSMSCA-30
LSMSCA-37
LSMSCA-44
LSMSCA-61
LSMSCA-91
18
LSMSCS-7
LSMSCS-10
LSMSCS-14
LSMSCS-19
LSMSCS-24
LSMSCS-30
LSMSCS-37
LSMSCS-44
LSMSCS-61
LSMSCS-91
19
LS6SGU-100
LS6SGU-125
LS6SGU-150
LS6SGU-200
19
LS6SGA-100
LS6SGA-125
LS6SGA-150
LS6SGA-200
20
LS7SGU-3
LS7SGU-4
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
23
MXCW-7
MXCW-10
MXCW-14
MXCW-19
MXCW-24
MXCW-30
MXCW-37
MXCW-44
MXCW-61
23
MXCWA-7
MXCWA-10
MXCWA-14
MXCWA-19
MXCWA-24
MXCWA-30
MXCWA-37
MXCWA-44
MXCWA-61
23
MXCOW-7
MXCOW-10
MXCOW-14
MXCOW-19
MXCOW-24
MXCOW-30
MXCOW-37
MXCOW-44
MXCOW-61
21
FXWA-3
FXWA-4
22
7XW-3
7XW-4
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
34
7SGA-3
7SGA-4
35
TCJU-4
35
TCJA-4
35
TCTU-4
35
TCTA-4
36
5KVTSGU-100
5KVTSGU-150
5KVTSGU-250
5KVTSGU-350
5KVTSGU-400
36
5KVTSGA-100
5KVTSGA-150
5KVTSGA-250
5KVTSGA-350
5KVTSGA-400
37
TTSU-1-1/2
TTSU-3
TTSU-5
TTSU-10
TTSU-15
TTSU-20
TTSU-30
TTSU-40
TTSU-60
37
TTSA-1-1/2
TTSA-3
TTSA-5
TTSA-10
TTSA-15
TTSA-20
TTSA-30
TTSA-40
TTSA-60
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
20
LS7SGA-3
LS7SGA-4
21
LSTCJU-4
21
LSTCJA-4
21
LSTCTU-4
21
LSTCTA-4
22
LS5KVTSGU-100
LS5KVTSGU-150
LS5KVTSGU-250
LS5KVTSGU-350
LS5KVTSGU-400
22
LS5KVTSGA-100
LS5KVTSGA-150
LS5KVTSGA-250
LS5KVTSGA-350
LS5KVTSGA-400
23
LSTTSU-1-1/2
LSTTSU-3
LSTTSU-5
LSTTSU-10
LSTTSU-15
LSTTSU-20
LSTTSU-30
LSTTSU-40
LSTTSU-60
23
LSTTSA-1-1/2
LSTTSA-3
LSTTSA-5
LSTTSA-10
LSTTSA-15
LSTTSA-20
LSTTSA-30
LSTTSA-40
LSTTSA-60
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
22
7XWA-3
7XWA-4
24
TTXW-1-1/2
TTXW-3
TTXW-5
TTXW-10
TTXW-15
TTXW-20
TTXW-30
TTXW-40
24
TTXWA-1-1/2
TTXWA-3
TTXWA-5
TTXWA-10
TTXWA-15
TTXWA-20
TTXWA-30
TTXWA-40
24
TTXOW-1-1/2
TTXOW-3
TTXOW-5
-TTXOW-15
TTXOW-20
TTXOW-30
TTXOW-40
E-9
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
38
TCJX-3
TCJX-7
TCJX-12
38
TCKX-1
TCKX-3
TCKX-7
TCKX-12
38
TCTX-1
TCTX-3
TCTS-7
TCTX-12
39
PI-3
PI-7
PI-12
40
DPS-3
DPS-4
DPS-6
DPS-9
40
TPS-3
TPS-4
TPS-6
TPS-9
TPS-14
TPS-30
40
FPS-14
40
7PS-6
41
2AU-40
41
2A-40
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
24
LSTCJX-3
LSTCJX-7
LSTCJX-12
24
LSTTCKX-1
LSTTCKX-3
LSTTCKX-7
LSTTCKX-12
24
LSTTCTX-1
LSTTCTX-3
LSTTCTX-7
LSTTCTX-12
25
LSPI-3
LSPI-7
LSPI-12
26
LSDPS-3
LSDPS-4
LSDPS-6
LSDPS-14
26
LSTPS-3
LSTPS-4
LSTPS-6
LSTPS-9
LSTPS-14
LSTPS-30
26
LSFPS-14
26
LS7PS-6
27
LS2AU-40
27
LS2A-40
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
06
41
E-10
2AUS-40
27
LS22AUS-40
2XAO-2
2XAO-7
2XAO-10
2XAO-18
2XAO-40
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
42
1S50MU-16
1S50MU-20
1S50MU-40
1S50MU-70
42
1S50MA-16
1S50MA-20
1S50MA-40
1S50MA-70
42
43
43
43
44
44
1S50MUS-16
1S50MUS-20
1S50MUS-40
1S50MUS-70
MU-14
MA-14
MUS-14
1SWU-2
1SWU-14
1SWU-20
1SWU-30
1SWA-2
1SWA-14
1SWA-20
1SWA-30
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
28
LS1S50MU-16
LS1S50MU-20
LS1S50MU-40
LS1S50MU-70
28
LS1S50MA-16
LS1S50MA-20
LS1S50MA-40
LS1S50MA-70
28
29
29
29
30
30
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
07
1XMSO-7
1XMSO-16
--1XMSO-70
08
MXO-10
MXO-14
14
1XSOW-2
1XSOW-14
1XSOW-20
1XSOW-30
2XS-2
2XS-3
2XS-7
2XS-10
2XS-14
2XS-19
2XS-24
2XS-30
LS1S50MUS-16
LS1S50MUS-20
LS1S50MUS-40
LS1S50MUS-70
LSMU-14
LSMA-14
LSMUS-14
LS1SWU-2
LS1SWU-14
LS1SWU-20
LS1SWU-30
LS1SWA-2
LS1SWA-14
LS1SWA-20
LS1SWA-30
09
45
2SU-3
2SU-7
2SU-10
2SU-14
2SU-19
2SU-24
2SU-30
2SU-37
2SU-44
2SU-61
31
LS2SU-3
LS2SU-7
LS2SU-10
LS2SU-14
LS2SU-19
LS2SU-24
LS2SU-30
LS2SU-37
LS2SU-44
LS2SU-61
E-11
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
45
2SA-3
2SA-7
2SA-10
2SA-14
2SA-19
2SA-24
2SA-30
2SA-37
2SA-44
2SA-61
45
2SUS-3
2SUS-7
2SUS-10
2SUS-14
2SUS-19
2SUS-24
2SUS-30
2SUS-37
2SUS-44
2SUS-61
46
2SWAU-3
2SWAU-7
2SWAU-10
2SWAU-14
2SWAU-19
2SWAU-24
2SWAU-30
2SWAU-37
2SWAU-44
2SWAU-61
46
2SWA-3
2SWA-7
2SWA-10
2SWA-14
2SWA-19
2SWA-24
2SWA-30
2SWA-37
2SWA-44
2SWA-61
E-12
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
31
LS2SA-3
LS2SA-7
LS2SA-10
LS2SA-14
LS2SA-19
LS2SA-24
LS2SA-30
LS2SA-37
LS2SA-44
LS2SA-61
31
LS2SUS-3
LS2SUS-7
LS2SUS-10
LS2SUS-14
LS2SUS-19
LS2SUS-24
LS2SUS-30
LS2SUS-37
LS2SUS-44
LS2SUS-61
32
LS2SWAU-3
LS2SWAU-7
LS2SWAU-10
LS2SWAU-14
LS2SWAU-19
LS2SWAU-24
LS2SWAU-30
LS2SWAU-37
LS2SWAU-44
LS2SWAU-61
32
LS2SWA-3
LS2SWA-7
LS2SWA-10
LS2SWA-14
LS2SWA-19
LS2SWA-24
LS2SWA-30
LS2SWA-37
LS2SWA-44
LS2SWA-61
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
09
2XSA-2
2XSA-3
2XSA-7
2XSA-10
2XSA-14
2XSA-19
2XSA-24
2XSA-30
09
2XSA-2
2XSA-3
2XSA-7
2XSA-10
2XSA-14
2XSA-19
-2XSA-30
15
2XSAW-3
2XSAW-7
-2XSAW-14
15
2XSAWA-3
2XSAWA-7
-2XSAWA-14
15
2XSAOW-3
2XSAOW-7
2XSAOW-10
2XSAOW-14
2XSAOW-19
2XSAOW-24
2XSAOW-30
2XSAOW-37
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
47
1SWF-2
48
2SWF-3
2SWF-4
2SWF-7
2SWF-24
49
2SWU-1
2SWU-3
2SWU-7
2SWU-12
2SWU-19
2SWU-24
49
2SWU-30
2SWU-37
2SWU-61
49
2SWUA-1
2SWUA-3
2SWUA-7
2SWUA-12
2SWUA-19
2SWUA-24
2SWUA-30
2SWUA-37
2SWUA-61
50
50
51
MS-37
MSA-37
3SU-3
3SU-7
3SU-10
3SU-14
3SU-19
3SU-24
3SU-30
3SU-37
3SU-44
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
33
33
33
34
34
35
LS2SWU-1
LS2SWU-3
LS2SWU-7
LS2SWU-12
LS2SWU-19
LS2SWU-24
LS2SWU-30
LS2SWU-37
LS2SWU-61
LS2SWUA-1
LS2SWUA-3
LS2SWUA-7
LS2SWUA-12
LS2SWUA-19
LS2SWUA-24
LS2SWUA-30
LS2SWUA-37
LS2SWUA-61
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
16
2XSW-1
2XSW-3
2XSW-7
16
2XSWA-1
2XSWA-3
2XSWA-7
16
2XSOW-3
2XSOW-7
2XSOW-12
2XSOW-19
2XSOW-30
10
MXSO-2
MSXO-9
MSXO-21
MSXO-37
11
3XS-7
LSMS-37
LSMSA-37
LS3SU-3
LS3SU-7
LS3SU-10
LS3SU-14
LS3SU-19
LS3SU-24
LS3SU-30
LS3SU-37
LS3SU-44
E-13
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
51
3SA-3
3SA-7
3SA-10
3SA-14
3SA-19
3SA-24
3SA-30
3SA-37
3SA-44
51
3SUS-3
3SUS-7
3SUS-10
3SUS-14
3SUS-19
3SUS-24
3SUS-30
3SUS-37
3SUS-44
52
3SWU-3
3SWU-7
3SWU-10
3SWU-14
3SWU-19
3SWU-24
3SWU-30
3SWU-37
3SWU-44
52
3SWA-3
3SWA-7
3SWA-10
3SWA-14
3SWA-19
3SWA-24
3SWA-30
3SWA-37
3SWA-44
52
3SWUS-3
3SWUS-7
3SWUS-10
3SWUS-14
3SWUS-19
3SWUS-24
3SWUS-30
3SWUS-37
3SWUS-44
53
3SU-3
3SU-7
3SU-12
E-14
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
35
LS3SA-3
LS3SA-7
LS3SA-10
LS3SA-14
LS3SA-19
LS3SA-24
LS3SA-30
LS3SA-37
LS3SA-44
35
LS3SUS-3
LS3SUS-7
LS3SUS-10
LS3SUS-14
LS3SUS-19
LS3SUS-24
LS3SUS-30
LS3SUS-37
LS3SUS-44
36
LS3SWU-3
LS3SWU-7
LS3SWU-10
LS3SWU-14
LS3SWU-19
LS3SWU-24
LS3SWU-30
LS3SWU-37
LS3SWU-44
36
LS3SWA-3
LS3SWA-7
LS3SWA-10
LS3SWA-14
LS3SWA-19
LS3SWA-24
LS3SWA-30
LS3SWA-37
LS3SWA-44
36
LS3SWUS-3
LS3SWUS-7
LS3SWUS-10
LS3SWUS-14
LS3SWUS-19
LS3SWUS-24
LS3SWUS-30
LS3SWUS-37
LS3SWUS-44
37
LS3SU-3
LS3SU-7
LS3SU-12
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
11
3XSA-7
18
3XSW-3
3XSW-7
3XSW-10
3XSW-14
18
3XSWA-3
3XSWA-7
3XSWA-10
3XSWA-14
18
3XSOW-3
3XSOW-7
3XSOW-12
3XSOW-19
3XSOW-30
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
53
3UA-3
3UA-7
3UA-12
54
ECM
54
ECMA
55
1S75MU-8
55
1S75MA-8
56
1SMU-5
56
1SMA-5
57
1SAU-44
57
1SA-44
58
MWF-7
MWF-10
MWF-14
MWF-19
MWF-24
MWF-30
MWF-37
59
1SU-36
1SU-60
59
1SUA-36
1SUA-60
60
2SJ-22
2SJ-20
2SJ-18
2SJ-16
2SJ-14
2SJ-12
2SJ-11
2SJ-9
2SJ-7
60
3SJ-22
3SJ-20
3SJ-18
3SJ-16
3SJ-14
3SJ-12
3SJ-11
3SJ-9
60
4SJ-20
4SJ-16
4SJ-14
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
37
LS3UA-3
LS3UA-7
LS3UA-12
38
LSECM
38
LSECMA
39
LS1S75MU-8
39
LS1S75MA-8
40
LS1SMU-5
40
LS1SMA-5
41
LS1SAU-44
41
LS1SA-44
42
42
43
43
43
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
LS1SU-36
LS1SU-60
LS1SUA-36
LS1SUA-60
LS2SJ-22
LS2SJ-20
LS2SJ-18
LS2SJ-16
LS2SJ-14
LS2SJ-12
LS2SJ-11
LS2SJ-9
LS2SJ-7
LS3SJ-22
LS3SJ-20
LS3SJ-18
LS3SJ-16
LS3SJ-14
LS3SJ-12
LS3SJ-11
LS3SJ-9
LS4SJ-20
LS4SJ-16
LS4SJ-14
E-15
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
60
2SJA-22
2SJA-20
2SJA-18
2SJA-16
2SJA-14
2SJA-12
2SJA-11
2SJA-9
2SJA-7
60
60
61
62
63
63
3SJA-22
3SJA-20
3SJA-18
3SJA-16
3SJA-14
3SJA-12
3SJA-11
3SJA-9
4SJA-20
4SJA-16
4SJA-14
2S2
3SF-7
2U-10
2U-15
2U-19
2U-30
2U-45
2U-60
2UA-10
2UA-15
2UA-19
2UA-30
2UA-45
2UA-60
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
43
LS2SJA-22
LS2SJA-20
LS2SJA-18
LS2SJA-16
LS2SJA-14
LS2SJA-12
LS2SJA-11
LS2SJA-9
LS2SJA-7
43
43
44
45
45
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
LS3SJA-22
LS3SJA-20
LS3SJA-18
LS3SJA-16
LS3SJA-14
LS3SJA-12
LS3SJA-11
LS3SJA-9
LS4SJA-20
LS4SJA-16
LS4SJA-14
LS3SF-7
LS2U-10
LS2U-15
LS2U-19
LS2U-30
LS2U-45
LS2U-60
LS2UA-10
LS2UA-15
LS2UA-19
LS2UA-30
LS2UA-45
LS2UA-60
12
17
E-16
2XO-6
2XO-18
2XO-24
2XO-42
2XO-60
2XO-77
2XOW-6
2XOW-18
2XOW-24
2XOW-42
2XOW-60
2XOW-77
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
64
2WAU-40
64
2WA-40
65
1SMWU-70
65
1SMWA-70
66
MSPW
67
MSP
68
DNW-3
DNW-4
DNW-9
DNW-14
DNW-23
DNW-50
DNW-75
DNW-100
68
DNWA-3
DNWA-4
DNWA-9
DNWA-14
DNWA-23
DNWA-50
DNWA-75
DNWA-100
69
TNW-3
TNW-4
TNW-9
TNW-14
TNW-23
TNW-50
TNW-75
TNW-100
69
TNWA-3
TNWA-4
TNWA-9
TNWA-14
TNWA-23
TNWA-50
TNWA-75
TNWA-100
70
FNW-3
FNW-4
FNW-9
FNW-23
70
FNWA-3
FNWA-4
FNWA-9
FNWA-23
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
46
LS2WAU-40
46
LS2WA-40
47
LS1SMWU-70
47
LS1SMWA-70
48
48
49
49
50
50
LSDNW-3
LSDNW-4
LSDNW-9
LSDNW-14
LSDNW-23
LSDNW-50
LSDNW-75
LSDNW-100
LSDNWA-3
LSDNWA-4
LSDNWA-9
LSDNWA-14
LSDNWA-23
LSDNWA-50
LSDNWA-75
LSDNWA-100
LSTNW-3
LSTNW-4
LSTNW-9
LSTNW-14
LSTNW-23
LSTNW-50
LSTNW-75
LSTNW-100
LSTNWA-3
LSTNWA-4
LSTNWA-9
LSTNWA-14
LSTNWA-23
LSTNWA-50
LSTNWA-75
LSTNWA-100
LSFNW-3
LSFNW-4
LSFNW-9
LSFNW-23
LSFNWA-3
LSFNWA-4
LSFNWA-9
LSFNWA-23
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
01
DX-3
DX-4
01
DXA-3
DXA-4
02
TX-3
TX-4
02
TXA-3
TXA-4
03
FX-3
FX-4
03
FXA-3
FXA-4
E-17
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
71
MNW-7
MNW-10
MNW-14
MNW-19
MNW-24
MNW-30
MNW-37
MNW-44
71
MNWA-7
MNWA-10
MNWA-14
MNWA-19
MNWA-24
MNWA-30
MNWA-37
MNWA-44
72
TPNW-1-1/2
TPNW-3
TPNW-5
TPNW-10
TPNW-15
TPNW-20
TPNW-30
TPNW-40
72
TPNWA-1-1/2
TPNWA-3
TPNWA-5
TPNWA-10
TPNWA-15
TPNWA-20
TPNWA-30
TPNWA-40
73
SRW
73
SRWA
73
DRW
73
DRWA
73
TRW
73
TRWA
74
5SS
75
8NW6
75
8NWA6
76
4NW8
76
4NWA8
77
2SWL-7
77
2SWLA-7
E-18
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
51
LSMNW-7
LSMNW-10
LSMNW-14
LSMNW-19
LSMNW-24
LSMNW-30
LSMNW-37
LSMNW-44
51
LSMNWA-7
LSMNWA-10
LSMNWA-14
LSMNWA-19
LSMNWA-24
LSMNWA-30
LSMNWA-37
LSMNWA-44
52
LSTPNW-1-1/2
LSTPNW-3
LSTPNW-5
LSTPNW-10
LSTPNW-15
LSTPNW-20
LSTPNW-30
LSTPNW-40
52
LSTPNWA-1-1/2
LSTPNWA-3
LSTPNWA-5
LSTPNWA-10
LSTPNWA-15
LSTPNWA-20
LSTPNWA-30
LSTPNWA-40
53
LSSRW
53
LSSRWA
53
LSDRW
53
LSDRWA
53
LSTRW
53
LSTRWA
54
54
55
55
56
56
LS8NW6
LS8NWA6
LS4NW8
LS4NWA8
LSSWL-7
LS2SWLA-7
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table E-1. Cable Comparison Chart (Continued)
MIL-C-915
Slash No.
Type
78
2UW-42
78
2UWA-42
78
2UWS-42
79
TPUM-6
80
2CS-6
2CS-18
2CS-42
2CS-60
2CS-77
81
1PR-A2OE
82
1PR-16
83
7PR-16
84
2SPR-16
85
3PR-16
86
1Q-16
87
1TR-16
88
7SPR-16S
89
1SPR-16
MIL-C-24643
Slash No.
Type
57
LS2UW-42
57
LS2UWA-42
57
LS2UWS-42
58
MIL-C-24640
Slash No.
Type
LS2CS-6
LS2CS-18
LS2CS-42
LS2CS-60
LS2CS-77
13
2XSXO-4
E-19/20
APPENDIX F
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING
REQUIREMENTS IN THE PRESENCE OF DC GENERATING COILS
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX F
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
IN THE PRESENCE OF DC GENERATING COILS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Paragraph
F-1
F-2
F-3
F-4
F-5
Page
INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................
SCOPE ........................................................................................................................
CABLE CATEGORIZATION WITH DC FIELDS..........................................................
DISTANCE FROM DC GENERATING COILS ............................................................
CABLE LABELING ......................................................................................................
F-1
F-1
F-1
F-2
F-3
LIST OF TABLES
Table
F-1
F-2
F-3
Page
Conduit On One Cable ................................................................................................ F-1
Conduit On Both Cables .............................................................................................. F-2
Minimum Required Spacing From dc Generating Coils .............................................. F-2
F-i/F-ii
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
APPENDIX F
GUIDELINES FOR CABLE SPACING AND SHIELDING REQUIREMENTS
IN THE PRESENCE OF DC GENERATING COILS
F-1
INTRODUCTION
Black iron pipe and highly permeable flexible shielding conduit is used in many shipboard cable
installations to reduce the likelihood of electromagnetic interference (EMI). Section 6 of this document
gives information regarding the application of shielding and spacing requirements in wireway design.
Concern has been raised over the effects that dc generating coils have on the shielding and
spacing requirements of Section 6. These fields can be as high as 20 gauss. Test results have shown
that the ac shielding effectiveness of flexible shielding conduit (Section 3) is reduced when subjected to dc
magnetic fields. These tests have also shown that there is no significant reduction in the ac shielding
effectiveness of black iron pipe (Section 2) when it is subjected to dc magnetic fields.
F-2
SCOPE
This section describes shielding and spacing requirements for platforms which contain dc
generating coils. These requirements are in addition to the Section 6 shielding and spacing requirements.
These requirements are to be used when flexible shielding conduit is used, they do not apply when black
iron pipe is used. The requirements in this section deal only with cables shielded with flexible shielding
conduit.
F-3
CABLE CATEGORIZATION WITH DC FIELDS
When only one cable (either the radiator or the susceptor) is shielded with flexible shielding conduit
the susceptor group number for S1, S2 and S4 type cables will be reduced by one group. Table F1
indicates this change and provides an example. When both cables (susceptor and radiator) are shielded
with flexible shielding conduit the susceptor group number for S1, S2, and S4 type cables will be reduced
by two groups. Table F-2 indicates this change and provides an example. Once the modified susceptor
category has been determined, the spacing and shielding requirements can be obtained by using the
procedures described in Section 6.
Table F-1. Conduit On One Cable
Cable/Conduit
Categorization
Categorization with
DC Fields
S1-X
S1-(X-1)
S2-X
S2-(X-1)
S4-X
S4-(X-1)
Example: S4-4
S4-3
F-1
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
Table F-2. Conduit On Both Cables
F-4
Cable/Conduit
Categorization
Categorization with
DC Fields
S1-X
S1-(X-2)
S2-X
S2-(X-2)
S4-X
S4-(X-2)
Example: S4-4
S4-2
DISTANCE FROM DC GENERATING COILS
When attempting to run cables in flexible shielding conduit close to dc generating coils a minimum
spacing requirement shall be met. This must be done in order to ensure that the maximum dc magnetic
field levels remain at or below 20 gauss. Table F-3 indicates the minimum spacing from dc generating
coils needed to ensure that the dc magnetic fields do not exceed 20 gauss. These spacing requirements
are in addition to the requirements of table F-1, table F-2, and Section 6.
Table F-3. Minimum Required Spacing From dc Generating Coils
NI (ampere-turns)
Minimum Distance
(inches)
1000
4.0
750
3.0
500
2.0
250
1.0
For ampere-turn values different from those listed in table F-3 the equation shown below should
be used to determine actual spacing requirements:
r = (0.004)NI inches
where:
F-2
I
N
=
=
Current in amps
Number of turns
S9407-AB-HBK-010, Rev. 2
F-5
CABLE LABELING
All cables which have had their categorization changed due to the conditions listed in appendix F
shall be identified by adding the letter “D” to the cable designator as shown in examples 1 through 4.
EXAMPLE
1
2
3
4
5
PREVIOUS DESIGNATOR
(S1-4)
(S4-2)
(S4-3S)
(R1-4/R7-2)
(S4-2/R2-3)S
MODIFIED DESIGNATOR
(S1-3D)
(S4-1D)
(S4-2SD)
(R1-4/R7-1)D
(S4-1/R2-3)SD
Only cables that have had their categorization changed due to the conditions listed in appendix F
require the additional “D” designation.
CHANGE 1 of Revision 2
F-3/F-4
DISTRIBUTION LIST
S9407-AB-010, Current List
EXTERNAL DISTRIBUTION LIST
FOR
NAVSEA HANDBOOK S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 2
NAVSEA, WASHINGTON, DC
CHIEF OF NAVAL OPERATIONS
CODE N872E4, N61F
COMMANDER IN CHIEF, U S ATLANTIC FLEET
CODE NFM2, N431
COMMANDER IN CHIEF, U S PACIFIC FLEET
CODE N4315
COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR FORCE, U S ATLANTIC FLEET
CODE 511.C
COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR FORCE, U S PACIFIC FLEET
CODE 736
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER, ATLANTIC
CODE 4231
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER ATLANTIC DET, GROTON CT
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER ATLANTIC DET, MAYPORT FL
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER, PACIFIC
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER PACIFIC DET, PEARL HARBOR
FLEET TECHNICAL SUPPORT CENTER PACIFIC DET, YOKOSUKA JAPAN
COMMANDER, NAVAL SURFACE FORCE U S ATLANTIC FLEET
CODE N443, C63C4
COMMANDER, NAVAL SURFACE FORCE U S PACIFIC FLEET
CODE N432
COMMANDER, NAVAL AIR SYSTEMS COMMAND
CODE 5161
COMMANDER, SPACE AND NAVAL WARFARE SYSTEMS COMMAND
CODE 2243A, PMW 151-23
7/31/01
1
S9407-AB-010, Current List
NAVAL SEA SYSTEMS COMMAND SUBMEPP ACTIVITY PORTSMOUTH NH
CODE 1823.3
NISE EAST CHARLESTON
CODE 323
NAVAL UNDERSEA WARFARE CENTER DIV NEWPORT
CODE 3431
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE FORCE, U S ATLANTIC FLEET
CODE N422
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE FORCE, U S PACIFIC FLEET
CODE 403
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 1
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 2
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 6
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 7
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 8
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 11
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 12
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 17
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE SQUADRON 20
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE DEVELOPMENT SQUADRON 12
COMMANDER, SUBMARINE GROUP 2
NAVAL SUBMARINE SCHOOL, GROTON CT
CODE 40
TRIDENT TRAINING FACILITY, BANGOR, WA
CODE 01A31
TRIDENT REFIT FACILITY, KINGS BAY, GA
CODE 424
7/31/01
2
S9407-AB-010, Current List
COMMANDER, OPERATIONAL TEST AND EVALUATION FORCE
U S NAVAL SHIP REPAIR FACILITY, GUAM
CODE 290
U S NAVAL SHIP REPAIR FACILITY, YOKOSUKA JAPAN
R4 DIVISION
NORFOLK NAVAL SHIPYARD
CODE 272, 293
SHOP 51, BLDG 510 (SURFACE PLANNING ELECTRICAL)
SHOP 51, BLDG 510 (SUBMARINE PLANNING ELECTRICAL)
SHOP 67, BLDG 510 (SURFACE PLANNING ELECTRONIC)
SHOP 67, BLDG 510 (SUBMARINE PLANNING ELECTRONIC)
PEARL HARBOR NAVAL SHIPYARD
CODE 190, 245, 272
PORTSMOUTH NAVAL SHIPYARD
CODE 190
PUGET SOUND NAVAL SHIPYARD
CODE 190, 272.57
NAVAL SURFACE WARFARE CENTER DIV DAHLGREN
CODE J54
NAVAL SURFACE WARFARE CENTER DIV CRANE
CODE C809
NAVAL SURFACE WARFARE CENTER DIV PORT HUENEME
CODE 4C11, 4B09, 4Y42
NAVAL SURFACE WARFARE CENTER CARDEROCK DIVISION DET ANNAPOLIS
NAVAL WEAPONS STATION, SEAL BEACH CA
NAVAL AMPHIBIOUS BASE CORONADO
NAVAL COMMAND CONTROL AND OCEAN SURVEILLANCE CENTER
CODE D825
NAVAL SUPPLY SYSTEMS COMMAND, MECHANICSBURG PA
CODE 051
JOINT SPECTRUM CENTER, ANNAPOLIS
ATTN NAVY DIRECTOR
7/31/01
3
S9407-AB-010, Current List
NAVAL RESEARCH LABORATORY
CODE 5330.2F
SUPSHIP BATH
CODE 290
SUPSHIP GROTON
CODE 200, 242, 273, 273C, 601
SUPSHIP JACKSONVILLE
CODE 280
SUPSHIP NEWPORT NEWS
CODE 274, 274E
SUPSHIP NEW ORLEANS
CODE 290
SUPSHIP PASCAGOULA
CODE 270, 290
SUPSHIP PORTSMOUTH
CODE 190
SUPSHIP SAN DIEGO
CODE 270, 290
SUPSHIP SAN DIEGO, DET PEARL HARBOR
CODE 150, 200
SUPSHIP SAN FRANCISCO
CODE 240
7/31/01
4
S9407-AB-010, Current List
PRIVATE SHIPYARDS
GENERAL DYNAMICS, EB DIV., GROTON, CT
Attn:
R. Strum, Dept. 201
R. LaFlamme, Dept 422
S. Carlo, Dept. 429
R. Lightle, Dept. 429
R. Myrehm, Dept. 429
W. Orkney, Dept. 429
P. Embry, Dept 443
M. Cordeau, Dept. 448
M. LaPort, Dept. 448
J. Szarzynski, Dept. 448
T. Baker, Dept 449
J. Vitale, Dept. 449
H. Apicelli, Dept. 459
P. Holsinger, Dept. 459
A. Restile, Dept 459
L. Baker, Dept 470
R. Gaucher, Dept 470
E. Thaxton, Dept 470
B. Donch, Dept 491
W. Langley, Dept 633
C. E. Giles, Dept 633 (Division Library)
INGALLS SHIPBUILDING CORP., PASCAGOULA, MS
Material Planning
Production Systems
Purchasing Dept.
Technical Library
NEWPORT NEWS SHIPBUILDING AND DRYDOCK CO.
Attn:
C. F. Clemens, Jr., Code E10
R. Crockford, Code E12
A. Palagri, Code E13
R. Swain, Code E13
S. Mancher, Code E67
Purchasing, Dept 051
Technical Library ,Bldg. 600
A. N. Strigle,Bldg. 600
R. Harrell, Design Division
7/31/01
5
S9407-AB-010, Current List
UNIVERSITIES
California Institute of Technology, Pasadena, CA
Attn:
Dr. R. D. Middlebrook
Georgia Institute of Technology, Atlanta, GA
Attn:
Dr. Hugh Dennoy
Pennsylvania State University, State College, PA
Attn:
J. Holland
University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Attn:
Dr. R. Showers
Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY
Attn:
Prof. J. Perini
University of Kentucky, Lexington, KY
Attn:
Dr. C. Paul
7/31/01
6
S9407-AB-010, Current List
CONTRACTORS
Analysis & Technology, Inc.
Panama City, FL
Attn:
W. Tolbert
Anamet, Incorporated
Waterbury, CT
Attn:
R. Picard
Anteon Corporation
Arlington, VA
Attn:
M. Craig
Anteon Corporation
San Diego, CA
Attn:
E. Quigley
Anteon Corporation
Virginia Beach, VA
Attn:
R. Karcher
Anteon Corporation
King George, VA
Attn:
B. Cotov
Bath Iron Works Corp.
Bath, ME
Attn:
F. Munger
Charles Stark Droper Lab., Inc., Cambridge, MA
Attn:
Technical Information Center, MS74
Dataproducts New England, Wallingford, CT
Darlington Inc., Wando SC
Attn:
S. Faith
B. Hall
Diagnostic Retrieval Systems, Oakland, NJ
Eldyne Inc.
Norfolk, VA
Attn:
M. Craft
7/31/01
7
S9407-AB-010, Current List
ENTRACO, Healdsburg, CA
Attn:
E. Goett
ESI, Peoria, IL
Attn:
J. D. Colgan
G. S. Parks
F & K System, Fillmore, CA
Attn:
F. Frederick
Fisher Associates, Bethesda, MD
Attn:
J. Fisher
Fleet Support Center/Analysis & Technology, Inc.
Chesapeake, VA
Attn:
S. Price
Fleet Support Center/Analysis & Technology, Inc.
North Stonington, CT
Attn:
R. Macek
J. Convey
E. Dobbs
FMH Corporation, Costa Mesa, CA
Attn:
C. W. Fullen
W. M. Cualin
G&H Technology, Camarillo, CA
Attn:
J. N. Chavarria
C. Guerrero
GE, Camden, NJ
Attn:
J. Sambalino
GE ESD., Moorestown, NJ
Attn:
M. Plofker
S. Light
B. Druchman
General Physics Service Co., Groton, CT
Attn:
D. Miles
Glenair, Inc., Glendale, CA
Attn:
P. Oaks
R. Hays
7/31/01
8
S9407-AB-010, Current List
GTE Government Systems, Mountain View, CA
Attn:
D. Bonnett
Icore, International, Sunnyvale, CA
Ingalls Shipbuilding Division
Litton
Pascagoula, MS
Attn:
D. Parker
ITT Corp, Gilifin Div., Van Nuns, CA
Attn:
R. Baida
Kaman Tempo, Alexandria, VA
Attn:
W. Tate
Lockheed Martin, Eagan, MN
Attn:
S. Anderson
Louis Allis Co., New Berlin, Wisconsin
Attn:
D. Swodzinski
Marinette Marine Corp., Marinette, WI
Attn:
L. Stankewicz
Martin Marietta Corp., New London, CT
Attn:
J. Ducas
Martin Marietta Corp., Syracuse, NY
Attn:
B. Davis
G. Radway
7/31/01
9
S9407-AB-010, Current List
McLaughlin Research Corp., Middletown, RI
Attn:
M. Mascoli
A. Ferdinandsen
W. Ricci
S. Sherman
A. McHale
C. Hauquitz
H. Stone
S. Clark
R. Mazerelli
National Steel & Shipbuilding Co.
San Diego, CA
Attn:
D. Langenhorst
Newport News Shipbuilding Co.
Newport News, VA
Attn:
R. Bains
Norfolk Shipbuilding Co.
Norfolk, VA
Attn:
R.G. Smith
Peterson Builders, Inc., Sturgeon Bay, WI
Attn:
M. Lucas
R&B Enterprises
Arlington, VA
Attn:
G. Johnson
P. Stoeberl
Raytheon Co., Sudbury, MA
Attn:
T. Kelley
Resource Consultants, Inc., Chula Vista, CA
Attn:
S. Yencer
SEACORP, New London, CT
Attn:
M. Jones
Stanford Applied Engineering, Inc., Santa Clara, CA
Structured Technology, Corp., Niantic, CT
Attn:
J. Seison
Tracor, Inc., Rockville, MD
Attn:
D. Craig
7/31/01
10
S9407-AB-010, Current List
Underwood Sales Corp., Wethersfield, CT
Attn:
K. Trifiro
Unidyne, Niantic CT
Attn:
J. Campbell
UNISYS, Charlottesville, VA
Attn:
Dr. B. Willard
UNISYS, System Management, Great Neck, NY
Attn:
M. Stall
VARO, Inc., Power Systems Division, Garland, TX
Attn:
B. Allen
Veam, Division of Litton Systems, Inc., Watertown, CT
Attn:
R. Matey
VITRO Corp., Groton, CT
Attn:
V. Asciolla
E. Hancock
J. Zebrowski
K. Sargent
R. Warenda
Western Electric, Greensboro, NC
Attn:
T. Skeen
William McCoy Co., Branford, CT
7/31/01
11
INTERNAL DISTRIBUTION LIST
FOR NUWC DIVISION NEWPORT, NEWPORT RI
F.C. ALLARD
CODE 3496
NEWPORT, RI 02841
C. P. AMIDON
CODE 3498
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. A. ANDERSON
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M.N. BARRAVECCHIA
CODE 5441
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. G. BUCKO
CODE 71
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M. CARPENTER
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
R. N. CARPENTER
CODE 8221
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. P. CONRAD
CODE 223
NEWPORT, RI 02841
L. CORMIER
CODE 2162
NEWPORT, RI 02841
D. CULBERTSON
CODE 3412
NEWPORT, RI 02841
P. DEAN
CODE 3413
NEWPORT, RI 02841
P.J. DEAN
CODE 31
NEWPORT, RI 02841
DR. D. F. DENCE
CODE 80
NEWPORT, RI 02841
C.F. DEREWIANY
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
S. DEVIN
CODE 3411
NEWPORT, RI 02841
3 COPIES
D. DIXON
CODE 343
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. DOWNIE
CODE 3412
NEWPORT, RI 02841
P.L. DUFFY
CODE 83
NEWPORT, RI 02841
W.A. FERREIRA
CODE 2201
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. FLOYD
CODE 3433
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. F. FREEMAN
CODE 2093
NEWPORT, RI 02841
T. GOFF
CODE 2223
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M. W. GOUZIE
CODE 2121
NEWPORT, RI 02841
D.R. HANNA
CODE 544
NEWPORT, RI 02841
B. HELME
CODE 2091
NEWPORT, RI 02841
2
3 COPIES
E. JAVOR
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
J. KAMINSKI
CODE 2162
NEWPORT, RI 02841
W. KING
CODE 222
NEWPORT, RI 02841
L. LAZAR
CODE 3123
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M. H. LEE
CODE 54
NEWPORT, RI 02841
A.C. LIVSEY
CODE 8323
NEWPORT, RI 02841
R. MARTIN
CODE 21
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M. MARTINO
CODE 3122
NEWPORT, RI 02841
G. MAJEWSKI
CODE 3411
NEWPORT, RI 02841
S. MAYER
CODE 2133
NEWPORT, RI 02841
M.J. McDONALD
CODE 3413
NEWPORT, RI 02841
J. McGRATH
CODE 8241
NEWPORT, RI 02841
C. McMILLIAN
CODE 3493
NEWPORT, RI 02841
3
T. MOSES
CODE 2223
NEWPORT, RI 02841
G. NARDONE
CODE 2222
NEWPORT, RI 02841
C. NAWROCKI
CODE 319
NEWPORT, RI 02841
R. OLIVEIRA
CODE 2291
NEWPORT, RI 02841
J. PERRY
CODE 342
NEWPORT, RI 02841
S. SAFFORD
CODE 3413
NEWPORT, RI 02841
D.D. SEIDER
CODE 2212
NEWPORT, RI 02841
J.D. SHEPARD
CODE 70T
NEWPORT, RI 02841
3 COPIES
R. SIMON
CODE 215
NEWPORT, RI 02841
3 COPIES
M. SPAZIANTE
CODE 3131
NEWPORT, RI 02841
F. STAWARZ
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
J. THIBEAULT
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
R.L. THIBEAULT
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
4
R. WHITE
CODE 3431
NEWPORT, RI 02841
5
INTERNAL NAVSEA DISTRIBUTION LIST
FOR
NAVSEA HANDBOOK S9407-AB-HBK-010, Revision 2 (CHANGE 1)
NAVSEA, WASHINGTON, DC
NAVSEA
(SEA 03D3, SEA 03Z44, SEA 05H3, SEA 05H31, SEA 05K, SEA 05K1,
SEA 05K3, SEA 05K4, SEA 08K/CHABAY)
PEO MIW
(PMS303A41, PMS407-21)
PEO SUB
(PMS350AB, PMS401B, PMS425-2, PMS450TIELEC, PMS450T2)
PEO TAD
(TAD-D31A, PMS 401-1)
PEO TSC
(PMS400B1, PMS400B3X, PMS400B6, PMS400D1, PMS400D4,
PMS400D5, PMS500TM)
PEO USW
(PMS411C)
SEA 91
(PMS307/A. BEVERIDGE)
SEA 92
(SEA 92C1, SEA 92C2, SEA 92C4, SEA 92T2, PMS 392A42, PMS395B)